US20010053115A1 - Optical recording method and optical recording medium - Google Patents

Optical recording method and optical recording medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20010053115A1
US20010053115A1 US09/884,121 US88412101A US2001053115A1 US 20010053115 A1 US20010053115 A1 US 20010053115A1 US 88412101 A US88412101 A US 88412101A US 2001053115 A1 US2001053115 A1 US 2001053115A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
recording
mark
pulse
reference clock
time
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
US09/884,121
Other versions
US6411579B2 (en
Inventor
Natsuko Nobukuni
Michikazu Horie
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
CMC Magnetics Co
Original Assignee
Mitsubishi Chemical Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Mitsubishi Chemical Corp filed Critical Mitsubishi Chemical Corp
Assigned to MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION reassignment MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: HORIE, MICHIKAZU, NOBUKUNI, NATSUKO
Publication of US20010053115A1 publication Critical patent/US20010053115A1/en
Priority to US10/141,981 priority Critical patent/US6661760B2/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of US6411579B2 publication Critical patent/US6411579B2/en
Priority to US10/657,121 priority patent/US7050377B1/en
Priority to US10/825,439 priority patent/USRE42786E1/en
Priority to US11/217,593 priority patent/US7085215B2/en
Assigned to MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. reassignment MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION
Priority to US13/179,256 priority patent/USRE45001E1/en
Assigned to MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. reassignment MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD. CHANGE OF ADDRESS Assignors: MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD.
Assigned to MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL MEDIA CO., LTD. reassignment MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL MEDIA CO., LTD. CHANGE OF NAME (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD.
Assigned to CMC MAGNETICS CORPORATION reassignment CMC MAGNETICS CORPORATION ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL MEDIA CO., LTD.
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Lifetime legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/004Recording, reproducing or erasing methods; Read, write or erase circuits therefor
    • G11B7/006Overwriting
    • G11B7/0062Overwriting strategies, e.g. recording pulse sequences with erasing level used for phase-change media
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B11/00Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B11/10Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field
    • G11B11/105Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field using a beam of light or a magnetic field for recording by change of magnetisation and a beam of light for reproducing, i.e. magneto-optical, e.g. light-induced thermomagnetic recording, spin magnetisation recording, Kerr or Faraday effect reproducing
    • G11B11/10502Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field using a beam of light or a magnetic field for recording by change of magnetisation and a beam of light for reproducing, i.e. magneto-optical, e.g. light-induced thermomagnetic recording, spin magnetisation recording, Kerr or Faraday effect reproducing characterised by the transducing operation to be executed
    • G11B11/10528Shaping of magnetic domains, e.g. form, dimensions
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B11/00Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B11/10Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field
    • G11B11/105Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field using a beam of light or a magnetic field for recording by change of magnetisation and a beam of light for reproducing, i.e. magneto-optical, e.g. light-induced thermomagnetic recording, spin magnetisation recording, Kerr or Faraday effect reproducing
    • G11B11/10502Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field using a beam of light or a magnetic field for recording by change of magnetisation and a beam of light for reproducing, i.e. magneto-optical, e.g. light-induced thermomagnetic recording, spin magnetisation recording, Kerr or Faraday effect reproducing characterised by the transducing operation to be executed
    • G11B11/1053Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field using a beam of light or a magnetic field for recording by change of magnetisation and a beam of light for reproducing, i.e. magneto-optical, e.g. light-induced thermomagnetic recording, spin magnetisation recording, Kerr or Faraday effect reproducing characterised by the transducing operation to be executed to compensate for the magnetic domain drift or time shift
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B20/00Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
    • G11B20/10Digital recording or reproducing
    • G11B20/14Digital recording or reproducing using self-clocking codes
    • G11B20/1403Digital recording or reproducing using self-clocking codes characterised by the use of two levels
    • G11B20/1423Code representation depending on subsequent bits, e.g. delay modulation, double density code, Miller code
    • G11B20/1426Code representation depending on subsequent bits, e.g. delay modulation, double density code, Miller code conversion to or from block codes or representations thereof
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/004Recording, reproducing or erasing methods; Read, write or erase circuits therefor
    • G11B7/0045Recording
    • G11B7/00454Recording involving phase-change effects
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/004Recording, reproducing or erasing methods; Read, write or erase circuits therefor
    • G11B7/0045Recording
    • G11B7/00456Recording strategies, e.g. pulse sequences
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/12Heads, e.g. forming of the optical beam spot or modulation of the optical beam
    • G11B7/125Optical beam sources therefor, e.g. laser control circuitry specially adapted for optical storage devices; Modulators, e.g. means for controlling the size or intensity of optical spots or optical traces
    • G11B7/126Circuits, methods or arrangements for laser control or stabilisation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/24Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/241Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/242Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers
    • G11B7/243Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers comprising inorganic materials only, e.g. ablative layers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/24Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/241Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/242Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers
    • G11B7/243Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers comprising inorganic materials only, e.g. ablative layers
    • G11B7/2433Metals or elements of groups 13, 14, 15 or 16 of the Periodic System, e.g. B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, Bi, Se or Te
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B11/00Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B11/10Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field
    • G11B11/105Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field using a beam of light or a magnetic field for recording by change of magnetisation and a beam of light for reproducing, i.e. magneto-optical, e.g. light-induced thermomagnetic recording, spin magnetisation recording, Kerr or Faraday effect reproducing
    • G11B11/10502Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field using a beam of light or a magnetic field for recording by change of magnetisation and a beam of light for reproducing, i.e. magneto-optical, e.g. light-induced thermomagnetic recording, spin magnetisation recording, Kerr or Faraday effect reproducing characterised by the transducing operation to be executed
    • G11B11/10504Recording
    • G11B11/10506Recording by modulating only the light beam of the transducer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B11/00Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B11/10Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field
    • G11B11/105Recording on or reproducing from the same record carrier wherein for these two operations the methods are covered by different main groups of groups G11B3/00 - G11B7/00 or by different subgroups of group G11B9/00; Record carriers therefor using recording by magnetic means or other means for magnetisation or demagnetisation of a record carrier, e.g. light induced spin magnetisation; Demagnetisation by thermal or stress means in the presence or not of an orienting magnetic field using a beam of light or a magnetic field for recording by change of magnetisation and a beam of light for reproducing, i.e. magneto-optical, e.g. light-induced thermomagnetic recording, spin magnetisation recording, Kerr or Faraday effect reproducing
    • G11B11/10595Control of operating function
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/24Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/241Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/242Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers
    • G11B7/243Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers comprising inorganic materials only, e.g. ablative layers
    • G11B2007/24302Metals or metalloids
    • G11B2007/24304Metals or metalloids group 2 or 12 elements (e.g. Be, Ca, Mg, Zn, Cd)
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/24Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/241Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/242Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers
    • G11B7/243Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers comprising inorganic materials only, e.g. ablative layers
    • G11B2007/24302Metals or metalloids
    • G11B2007/24306Metals or metalloids transition metal elements of groups 3-10
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/24Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/241Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/242Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers
    • G11B7/243Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers comprising inorganic materials only, e.g. ablative layers
    • G11B2007/24302Metals or metalloids
    • G11B2007/24308Metals or metalloids transition metal elements of group 11 (Cu, Ag, Au)
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/24Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/241Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/242Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers
    • G11B7/243Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers comprising inorganic materials only, e.g. ablative layers
    • G11B2007/24302Metals or metalloids
    • G11B2007/2431Metals or metalloids group 13 elements (B, Al, Ga, In)
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/24Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/241Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/242Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers
    • G11B7/243Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers comprising inorganic materials only, e.g. ablative layers
    • G11B2007/24302Metals or metalloids
    • G11B2007/24312Metals or metalloids group 14 elements (e.g. Si, Ge, Sn)
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/24Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/241Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/242Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers
    • G11B7/243Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers comprising inorganic materials only, e.g. ablative layers
    • G11B2007/24302Metals or metalloids
    • G11B2007/24314Metals or metalloids group 15 elements (e.g. Sb, Bi)
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/24Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/241Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/242Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers
    • G11B7/243Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers comprising inorganic materials only, e.g. ablative layers
    • G11B2007/24302Metals or metalloids
    • G11B2007/24316Metals or metalloids group 16 elements (i.e. chalcogenides, Se, Te)
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/24Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/241Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/242Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers
    • G11B7/243Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of recording layers comprising inorganic materials only, e.g. ablative layers
    • G11B2007/24318Non-metallic elements
    • G11B2007/2432Oxygen
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B20/00Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
    • G11B20/10Digital recording or reproducing
    • G11B20/14Digital recording or reproducing using self-clocking codes
    • G11B20/1403Digital recording or reproducing using self-clocking codes characterised by the use of two levels
    • G11B20/1423Code representation depending on subsequent bits, e.g. delay modulation, double density code, Miller code
    • G11B20/1426Code representation depending on subsequent bits, e.g. delay modulation, double density code, Miller code conversion to or from block codes or representations thereof
    • G11B2020/145317PP modulation, i.e. the parity preserving RLL(1,7) code with rate 2/3 used on Blu-Ray discs
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B20/00Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
    • G11B20/10Digital recording or reproducing
    • G11B20/14Digital recording or reproducing using self-clocking codes
    • G11B20/1403Digital recording or reproducing using self-clocking codes characterised by the use of two levels
    • G11B20/1423Code representation depending on subsequent bits, e.g. delay modulation, double density code, Miller code
    • G11B20/1426Code representation depending on subsequent bits, e.g. delay modulation, double density code, Miller code conversion to or from block codes or representations thereof
    • G11B2020/14658 to 16 modulation, e.g. the EFM+ code used on DVDs
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B2220/00Record carriers by type
    • G11B2220/20Disc-shaped record carriers
    • G11B2220/25Disc-shaped record carriers characterised in that the disc is based on a specific recording technology
    • G11B2220/2537Optical discs
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/24Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/241Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/252Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of layers other than recording layers
    • G11B7/253Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of layers other than recording layers of substrates
    • G11B7/2533Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of layers other than recording layers of substrates comprising resins
    • G11B7/2534Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of layers other than recording layers of substrates comprising resins polycarbonates [PC]
    • GPHYSICS
    • G11INFORMATION STORAGE
    • G11BINFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
    • G11B7/00Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
    • G11B7/24Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/241Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material
    • G11B7/252Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of layers other than recording layers
    • G11B7/258Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of layers other than recording layers of reflective layers
    • G11B7/2585Record carriers characterised by shape, structure or physical properties, or by the selection of the material characterised by the selection of the material of layers other than recording layers of reflective layers based on aluminium

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an optical recording method and an optical recording medium.
  • optical disks There are two types of optical disks: a write-once type that allows the user to record data only once, and a rewritable type that allows the user to record and erase data as many times as they wish.
  • Examples of the rewritable optical disk include a magnetooptical recording medium that utilizes a magneto-optical effect and a phase-change type recording medium that utilizes a change in reflectance accompanying a reversible crystal state change.
  • the principle of recording an optical disk involves applying a recording power to a recording layer to raise the temperature of that layer to or above a predetermined critical temperature to cause a physical or chemical change for data recording.
  • This principle applies to all of the following media: a write-once medium utilizing pitting or deformation, an magnetooptical medium utilizing a magnetic reversal at the vicinity of the Curie point, and a phase change medium utilizing a phase transition between amorphous and crystal states of the recording layer.
  • the mark length recording is a method that records data by changing both the lengths of marks and the lengths of spaces. Compared with a mark position recording method which changes only the lengths of the spaces, this method is more suited to increasing the recording density and can increase the recording density by as much as 1.5 times. However, to retrieve data accurately makes the detection of the time length of the mark stringent, thus requiring precise control of the shape of mark edges. Further, there is another difficulty that a plurality of kinds of marks with different lengths, from short marks to long marks, need to be formed.
  • the spatial length of a mark is referred to as a mark length and a time length of the mark as a mark time length.
  • the mark length and the mark time length have a one-to-one correspondence.
  • nT mark a mark having a mark time length of nT where T is a reference clock period of data and n is a natural number
  • T is a reference clock period of data
  • n is a natural number
  • simply radiating a recording power of square wave with the time length of nT or with the length finely adjusted will result in the front and rear ends of each mark differing in temperature distribution, which in turn causes the rear end portion in particular to accumulate heat and widen, forming an mark with an asymmetric geometry. This raises difficulties in precisely controlling the mark length and suppressing variations of the mark edge.
  • a recording pulse is divided to adjust the geometry of an amorphous mark (JP-A 62-259229, JP-A 63-266632). This approach is also utilized in the write-once medium that is not overwritten. Further, an off pulse is widely employed as a mark shape compensation means (JP-A 63-22439, etc.)
  • JP-A 7-37252 Other proposed methods include one which deliberately dull a trailing edge of the recording pulse to adjust the mark length and the mark time length (JP-A 7-37252); one which shifts a recording pulse radiation time (JP-A 8-287465); one which, in a multipulse recording method, differentiates a value of bias power during the mark writing operation from that during the space writing operation or erasing operation (JP-A 7-37251); and one which controls a cooling time according to a linear velocity (JP-A 9-7176).
  • the recording method based on the above pulse division approach is also used in the magnetooptical recording medium and the write-once type optical recording medium.
  • this approach aims to prevent heat from becoming localized.
  • this approach has additional objective of preventing recrystallization.
  • mark length modulation recording include a CD compatible medium using an EFM (Eight-Fourteen Modulation), a DVD compatible medium using an EFM+ modulation, a variation of 8-16 modulation, and a magnetooptical recording medium using a (1, 7)-RLL-NRZI (Ruu-Length Limited Non-Return to Zero Inverted) modulation.
  • the EFM modulation provides 3T to 11T marks; the EFM+ modulation provides 3T to 14T marks; and the (1, 7)-RLL-NRZI modulation provides 2T to 8T marks.
  • the EFM+ modulation and the (1, 7)-RLL-NRZI modulation are known as modulation methods for high-density mark length modulation recording.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a power pattern of the recording light used in this recording method.
  • a pattern shown in FIG. 2( b ) is used.
  • T is a reference clock period; and n is a mark length, an integer value, that can be taken in the mark length modulation recording
  • ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) the recording light with the recording power Pw is radiated and, in the ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) section, the bias power Pb (Pb ⁇ Pw) is radiated.
  • the reference clock period T decreases as the density or speed increases. For example, T decreases in the following cases.
  • the clock frequency is increased to reduce the reference clock period T.
  • the reference clock period T during a ⁇ 1-speed operation (linear velocity is 1.2-1.4 m/s) is 231 nanoseconds; but during a ⁇ 10-speed operation the reference clock period T becomes very short, 23.1 nanoseconds.
  • the reference clock frequency T during a ⁇ 1-speed operation (3.5 m/s) is 38.2 nanoseconds, it is 19.1 ns during a ⁇ 2-speed operation.
  • the reference clock period T is very short.
  • the recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T and the off pulse section ⁇ 1 T also tend to become short. Under these circumstances the following problems arise.
  • the recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T may be too short for the rising/falling edge speed of radiated light, particularly a laser, to follow.
  • a rise time is a time taken by the projected power of radiated light such as laser to reach a set value
  • a fall time is a time taken by the projected power of the radiated light such as laser to fall from the set value to a complete off level.
  • the rise and fall times take at least 2-3 nanoseconds respectively.
  • the pulse width is less than 15 ns, for example, the time it takes for the light to actually project a required power is a few nanoseconds.
  • the pulse width is less than five nanoseconds
  • the projected power begins to fall before it reaches the set value, so that the temperature of the recording layer does not rise sufficiently, failing to produce a predetermined mark size.
  • the recording medium cannot take a sufficient time to cool down and the off pulse function (cooling speed control function) does not work although the off pulse section is provided, leaving heat to be accumulated in the rear end part of the mark, making it impossible to form the correct shape of the mark. This problem becomes more serious as the length of the mark increases.
  • the currently available phase change medium typically takes crystal portions as an unrecorded state or erased state and amorphous portions as a recorded state.
  • To form an amorphous mark involves radiating a laser onto a tiny area of the recording layer to melt that tiny portion and quickly cooling it to form an amorphous mark.
  • a long mark (a mark more than about 5T in length based on the EFM modulation recording for CD format) is formed using a rectangular waveform of recording power with no off pulse section at all, as shown in FIG. 3( a )
  • an amorphous mark with a narrow rear end is formed as shown in FIG. 3( b ) and a distorted retrieve waveform is observed as shown in FIG. 3( c ).
  • Inserting the off pulse sections makes sharp the temperature change over time of the recording layer ranging from the front end to the rear end of the long mark, preventing degradation of the mark due to recrystallization during recording.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic temperature history of the mark starting end, with FIG. 4( a ) representing a case in which the linear velocity is low and FIG. 4( b ) a case in which the linear velocity is high. In either case, three temperature rising processes due to ⁇ 1 T, ⁇ 2 T, ⁇ 3 T and three cooling processes due to ⁇ 1 T, ⁇ 2 T, ⁇ 3 T are observed.
  • the time during which the recording layer stays in the crystallization temperature range is much longer for T 4 +T 5 +T 6 of the high linear velocity than for T 1 +T 2 +T 3 of the low linear velocity, so it is understood that the recrystallization is more likely to take place at the fast linear velocity.
  • a crystal is likely to grow at the amorphous/crystal boundary and therefore recrystallization easily occurs outer area of the mark.
  • phase change medium in which an amorphous mark is recorded over a crystal area, although it is generally easy at high linear velocity to secure an enough cooling speed to form an amorphous solid, the crystallization time is difficult to secure.
  • the phase change medium often employs a recording layer of a composition which tends to be easily crystallized, i.e., a recording layer of an easily recrystallizable composition. Therefore, it is important to increase the off pulse section to enhance the cooling effect, but during the high linear velocity the off pulse section becomes short to the contrary.
  • the present invention has been accomplished to solve the aforementioned problems. It is an object of the invention to provide an optical recording method and an optical recording medium suited for the method, which can perform recording in a satisfactory manner even during a mark length recording using a short clock period suited for high density recording and high speed recording.
  • the present invention provides an optical recording method for recording mark length-modulated information with a plurality of recording mark lengths by radiating light against a recording medium, the optical recording method comprising the steps of:
  • nT a time length of one recording mark
  • T is a reference clock period equal to or less than 25 ns
  • n is a natural number equal to or more than 2
  • ⁇ 1 ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 1 )+ ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 2 n; ⁇ 1 (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) is a real number larger than 0; ⁇ 1 (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) is a real number larger than 0; ⁇ m is a real number larger than or equal to 0; and ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 are real numbers between ⁇ 2 and 2); and
  • the pulse division number m is 2 or more for the time duration of at least one recording mark and meets n/m ⁇ 1.25 for the time length of all the recording marks
  • the present invention provides a phase change type optical recording medium recorded by the optical recording method, the phase change type optical recording medium having a recording layer made of M z Ge y (Sb x Te 1-x ) 1-y-x alloy (where 0 ⁇ z ⁇ 0.1, 0 ⁇ y ⁇ 0.3, 0.8 ⁇ x; and M is at least one of In, Ga, Si, Sn, Pb, Pd, Pt, Zn, Au, Ag, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Co, Mo, Mn, Bi, O, N and S).
  • M is at least one of In, Ga, Si, Sn, Pb, Pd, Pt, Zn, Au, Ag, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Co, Mo, Mn, Bi, O, N and S).
  • FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example recording pulse division scheme and an example method of generating the recording pulses according to the invention.
  • FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional recording pulse division scheme.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a shape of a recorded mark and a change of reflectance in a phase change optical recording medium.
  • FIG. 4 is an example of temperature history when recording light is radiated against the recording layer of the phase change optical recording medium.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of retrieved waveforms (eye-pattern) of an EFM modulation signal.
  • FIG. 6 is an example of division scheme of a recording pulse for an 11T mark according to an embodiment of the invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a graph showing a relation between ⁇ 1 and a mark time length in the embodiment 1 of the invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a graph showing a relation between ⁇ m and a mark time length in the embodiment 1 of the invention.
  • FIG. 9 is an example of division scheme of a recording pulse for an EFM random pattern in the embodiment 1 of the invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a graph showing a relation of measured values of mark time length/space time length with respect to theoretical values in the embodiment 1 of the invention.
  • FIG. 11 is an example of conventional division scheme of a recording pulse for a 11T mark/11T space.
  • FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pulse division scheme according to the invention.
  • FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a timing for generating a gate in the pulse division scheme of FIG. 12.
  • FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing a pulse division scheme in (1) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 15 is a graph showing a dependency of a modulation in (1) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a pulse division scheme in (2) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 17 is a graph showing a dependency of ⁇ 1 of a mark length (- ⁇ -) and a space length (- ⁇ -) in (2) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 18 is a graph showing a dependency of ⁇ 1 of a mark length (- ⁇ -) and a space length (- ⁇ -) in (2) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 19 is a graph showing a dependency of ⁇ m of a mark length (- ⁇ -) and a space length (- ⁇ -) in (2) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a pulse division scheme in (3) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 21 is a graph showing a mark length (- ⁇ -) and a space length (- ⁇ -), and their jitters in (3) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing a pulse division scheme in (4) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 23 is a graph showing a mark length (- ⁇ -) and a space length (- ⁇ -), and their jitters in (4) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pulse division scheme according to the invention.
  • FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pulse division scheme according to embodiment 4 and a dependency on Tw/T of a modulation obtained.
  • FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pulse division scheme according to embodiment 4 of the invention.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a dependency on power of modulation and jitter and a dependency of jitter on the number of overwrites.
  • FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a pulse division scheme according to embodiment 4.
  • the optical recording method of this invention reduces the number of divisions in the pulse division scheme, i.e., elongates each pulse of recording light to make the time during which to heat a light-irradiated portion of the optical recording medium sufficiently long with respect to the response speed of the laser pulse and also sets the time during which to cool the light-irradiated portion sufficiently long. This enables satisfactory mark length recording even with a clock period as low as 25 nm or less.
  • time length of a recording mark is nT (T is a reference clock period equal to or less than 25 ns; and n is a natural number equal to or more than 2).
  • T is a reference clock period equal to or less than 25 ns; and n is a natural number equal to or more than 2).
  • nT of the recording mark is divided in the following order:
  • ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) In the time length of ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m), recording light with a recording power Pw 1 is radiated; and in the time length of ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m), recording light with a bias power Pb 1 , which has the relation of Pb 1 ⁇ Pw 1 and Pb 1 ⁇ Pw 1+1 , is radiated.
  • the above pulse division number m is set to 2 or more; and as for the time length of all recording marks, n/m ⁇ 1.25.
  • n ⁇ k division scheme sets the pulse division number m equal to n ⁇ k (k is 1 or 2)
  • this invention defines the pulse division number m from a different perspective.
  • the above pulse division number m is set to 2 or more. It should be noted, however, that there is no need to perform the pulse division for all nT marks (marks with a time length of nT; T is a reference clock period; and n is a natural number equal to or larger than 2).
  • the problem of heat accumulation is relatively small but the response speed of the pulse being unable to follow the pulse division poses a more serious problem. It is therefore preferred that only one pulse of recording light with a recording power of Pw be radiated or that one pulse of recording light with the recording power of Pw and one pulse of recording light with a bias power of Pb be radiated.
  • n/m are approximately 1.22, 1.16 and 1.14.
  • the average period of the divided pulses in the longest mark is generally less than 25 nanoseconds and the average value of the recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T or the average value of the off pulse section ⁇ 1 T is less than 12.5 nanoseconds. This means that for at least one i, either ⁇ 1 T or ⁇ 1 T is less than 12.5 nanoseconds. Further, when the clock period T goes below approximately 20 seconds, either ⁇ 1 T or ⁇ 1 T becomes further smaller.
  • m is set to satisfy the condition of n/m ⁇ 1.25 as to the time length of all recording marks ranging from short to long marks.
  • the lengths of ⁇ 1 T and ⁇ 1 T are made sufficiently long.
  • the recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T and the off pulse section ⁇ 1 T can generally be set slightly longer than 0.5T to sufficiently heat the recording layer and at the same time limit the heat being supplied from the subsequent pulses and thereby produce a sufficient cooling effect.
  • n/m should preferably be set to 1.5 or more. It is of course preferred that, also for short marks 6T or shorter, n/m be set to 1.5 or more, more preferably to 1.8 or more.
  • n/m is preferably set to 4 or less, more preferably 3 or less.
  • the optical recording method of this invention produces a greater effect as the reference clock period T decreases, and it is preferred that the reference clock period be set to 20 nm or less or more preferably 15 ns or less.
  • a very short clock period is difficult to achieve in practice and it is normally preferred that the clock period have 0.1 ns or more, or preferably 1 ns or more, or more preferably 3 ns or more.
  • the clock period T decreases, it is desired that the minimum value of n/m be increased.
  • the recording mark in this invention is recognized as a physical mark formed continuously in a recording medium and optically distinguishable from other portions. That is, the invention does not join, through processing by a reproducing system, 2T, 3T and 4T marks of the conventional n ⁇ k division scheme that meet the condition of n/m ⁇ 1.25 and recognize them as a single long mark.
  • the recording mark may be formed of a plurality of physical marks that are below the optical resolution power of the retrieveing light. If we let the numerical aperture of an objective for focusing the retrieveing light be NA and the wavelength of the retrieveing light be ⁇ , when the physical marks are spaced from each other by 0.2 ( ⁇ /NA) or more, these physical marks can be optically distinguishable as separate marks.
  • NA numerical aperture of an objective for focusing the retrieveing light
  • ⁇ /NA the wavelength of the retrieveing light
  • the parameters associated with the divided pulses such as ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , Pw and Pb can be changed as required according to the mark length and i.
  • the average value of the recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) and the average value of the off pulse section ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) both be set to 3 nanoseconds or more, preferably 5 nanoseconds or more, or more preferably 10 nanoseconds or more in terms of securing the response capability of the radiated light. More preferably, individual ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) and ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) are set to 3 nanoseconds or more, or 5 nanoseconds or more, or more specifically 10 nanoseconds or more.
  • the rise time and fall time of the power of the laser beam normally used during the process of recording should preferably be set 50% or less of the minimum ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) and ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m).
  • ⁇ m T should preferably be provided. In that case, it is preferred that ⁇ m T be set normally to 3 nanoseconds or more, or specifically to 5 nanoseconds or more, or more preferably to 10 nanoseconds or more.
  • the radiation energy required for recording can be secured by increasing the recording power Pw 1 although there is a problem of the rising/falling edge of the recording light.
  • the cooling effect can be secured by reducing the bias power Pb down to nearly the retrieveing light power Pr or to 0 as long as this is not detrimental to a tracking servo or others.
  • the values of ⁇ 1 (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) and ⁇ 1 (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) are set appropriately according to the values of the recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) and the off pulse section ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) and are normally set to 0.01 or more, preferably 0.05 or more, and normally 5 or less, preferably 3 or less. Too small a value of ⁇ 1 (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) may result in an insufficient cooling effect and hence it is preferably set to 0.5 or more, specifically 1 or more. On the other hand, too large a value of ⁇ 1 may cause an excessive cooling and result in the recording mark being optically separated. Hence it is preferably set to 2.5 or less, specifically 2 or less. The effect of this setting is particularly large in the first off pulse section ⁇ 1 T that has a great effect on the shape of the front end of the mark.
  • ⁇ m is normally set to 0.1 or more, preferably 0.5 or more, more preferably 1 or more, and 2.5 or less, preferably 2 or less.
  • the switching period of intermediate pulse sections (group) ⁇ 1 T (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) between the start pulse section ⁇ 1 T and the last pulse section ⁇ m T should preferably be set constant in terms of simplifying the circuit.
  • ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 1 )T (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) or ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 1 ⁇ 1 )T (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) is preferably set to l.5T, 2T or 2.5T.
  • the recording light power Pb 1 radiated during the off pulse section ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) is set smaller than the powers Pw 1 and Pw 1+1 of the recording light radiated during the recording pulse sections ⁇ 1 T and ⁇ 1+1 T.
  • Pb 1 ⁇ Pw 1 be set for the time lengths of all recording marks. More preferably Pb 1 /Pw ⁇ 0.5 and still more preferably Pb 1 /Pw 1 ⁇ 0.2.
  • the bias power Pb can be set equal to the power Pr of the light radiated during retrieving. This simplifies the setting of the divided pulse circuit required for the pulse division.
  • two or more different values of Pb 1 and/or Pw 1 may be used according to i.
  • setting the recording powers Pw 1 and Pw m used in the start recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T and the last recording pulse section ⁇ m T to values different from the recording power Pw 1 used in the intermediate recording pulse sections ⁇ i T (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) can control the shape of the front and rear ends of the mark accurately.
  • the recording powers Pw 1 in the intermediate recording pulse sections ⁇ 1 T (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) be set equal as practically as possible as this simplifies the setting of the divided pulse circuit.
  • the bias powers Pb 1 in the off pulse sections ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) be all set to the same value as practically as possible unless there is any justifiable reason. At least two recording marks with different n's may have different values of Pw 1 and/or Pb 1 for the same i.
  • the light to be radiated should preferably have a power Pe, which is Pb 1 ⁇ Pe ⁇ Pw 1 .
  • the power Pe is an erase power used to erase the recorded marks.
  • the light with the bias power Pb is radiated during an ⁇ 1 T section, the light with the bias power Pb is radiated prior to the start recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T, thus minimizing the influences of heat from the preceding recording mark.
  • the recording power Pw and bias power Pb or erase power Pe have different physical functions depending on the type of the optical recording medium used.
  • Pw or Pe is a power necessary to raise the temperature of the recording layer at least above the vicinity of the Curie temperature to make the occurrence of the magnetization inversion easy.
  • Pw is greater than Pe and is a power to raise the temperatures of a plurality of magnetic layers with different Curie points above one of the Curie point temperatures.
  • Pw is a power to raise the recording layer to a temperature higher than the crystallization temperature.
  • Pw is a power to raise the recording layer at least to a temperature higher than its melting point.
  • Pe is a power to raise the recording layer at least above the crystallization temperature.
  • Pw is a power necessary to raise the recording layer to a temperature that induces softening, melting, evaporation, decomposition or chemical reaction.
  • the values of the recording power Pw and bias power Pb differ from one kind of recording medium used to another, in the rewritable phase change medium for example the recording power Pw is normally about 1-100 mW and the bias power Pb about 0.01-10 mW.
  • the recording power Pw is a laser beam power necessary to raise the recording layer to a temperature that induces some optical changes in the recording layer, or to hold that temperature.
  • the bias power Pb on the other hand is a power at least lower than the recording power Pw. Normally, the bias power Pb is lower than the recording power Pw and the erase power Pe and does not induce any physical changes in the recording layer.
  • the same pulse division number m may be used on at least two recording marks which have different n's of time lengths nT of the pulse recording marks.
  • the same m values are used for the nT marks having adjoining time lengths, such as 3T mark and 4T mark.
  • m values set equal at least one of ⁇ 1 (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m), ⁇ 1 (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m), ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , Pw 1 (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) and Pb 1 (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) is made to differ from others. This makes it possible to differentiate the time lengths of the marks from one another that have the same division numbers.
  • the division numbers m may be arranged irrelevant to the magnitudes of the n values but it is preferred that the division numbers m be set to monotonously increase as the mark becomes longer, i.e., the value of m increases (including the case of staying the same).
  • n 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11.
  • n 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11.
  • n 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11.
  • the pulse period ⁇ 1 is preferably synchronized to the reference clock period T or to the reference clock period T divided by an integer (preferably 1/2T, 1/4T, 1/5T, 1/10T) as this allows the rising/falling edge of the pulse to be controlled with one base clock taken as a reference.
  • ⁇ 1 T, ⁇ 2 T light with the bias power Pb may be radiated. At this time, it is preferred that 0 ⁇ ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 2 ) ⁇ 1.
  • ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 can also be used to correct the effect of heat transferred from other preceding and/or subsequent marks.
  • the time lengths of ⁇ 1 T and ⁇ 2 T are made variable according to the mark lengths and/or space lengths of the preceding and/or subsequent marks.
  • the divided pulse period ⁇ 1 and the duty ratio ( ⁇ 1 /( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 1 )) are made variable according to i.
  • jitters fluctuations in the front and rear ends of the mark, which are important in the mark length recording, can be improved.
  • the first recording pulse period ⁇ 1 and/or the last recording pulse period ⁇ m are made to differ from a recording pulse period ⁇ 1 (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) of intermediate pulses.
  • the first recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T be set larger than any of the subsequent recording pulse sections ⁇ 2 T, . . . , ⁇ m T. It is also preferred that the recording power Pw 1 be set higher than the recording power Pw 1 in the succeeding recording pulse sections ⁇ 2 T, . . . , ⁇ m T. These methods are effective in improving an asymmetry value of the retrieve signal described later.
  • the heat accumulation effect is small in short marks such as those with time lengths of 3T and 4T, so that the mark tends to be formed slightly shorter than required.
  • the mark time length may be strictly controlled by elongating the recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T to some extent or setting the recording power Pw 1 in the recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T slightly higher than required.
  • the method of changing the first pulse or last pulse is particularly effective when overwriting an amorphous mark in the crystal area of the phase change medium.
  • Changing the first recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T can control the width of an area of the recording layer in the phase change medium that first melts.
  • the last off pulse section ⁇ m T is important in preventing the recording layer of the phase change medium from getting recrystallized and is also an important pulse that determines the area in which the recording layer is made amorphous.
  • the above pulse division can basically be realized by making the division scheme for each mark time length nT programmable and incorporating it into a ROM chip.
  • adding a very wide range of flexibility to the same pulse generating circuit will render the circuit complex. So, the following two pulse generating methods may preferably be used. They can provide pulses capable of dealing with almost all media with ease.
  • the Gate 1 denoted 102 generates the first recording pulse ⁇ 1 T with a delay time of T d1 .
  • the Gate 2 denoted 103 generates a group of second and subsequent intermediate recording pulses ⁇ 1 T with a delay time of T d2 .
  • the Gate 3 denoted 104 generates pulses with a bias power Pb and pulses with power Pe. That is, when recording pulses are not generated by the Gate 1 , Gate 2 and Gate 4 , off pulses ⁇ 1 T with a bias power Pb aretrieved when the level is low and pulses with a power Pe aretrieved when the level is high.
  • the Gate 3 and T d1 determine (n ⁇ ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 2 ))T.
  • the Gate 4 denoted 105 generates a last recording pulse ⁇ m T with a delay time of T d3 after the intermediate recording pulse group ⁇ 1 T has been generated.
  • the Gate 3 is at low level, when the recording pulses are at high level, they have priority over the off pulses.
  • ⁇ 1 T can be controlled independently by the delay time T d2 and ⁇ 1 T
  • ⁇ m T can be controlled independently by Gate 3 and ⁇ m T.
  • a recording power Pw 1 is used; in the sections where the intermediate pulse group ⁇ 1 T is generated by the Gate 2 , a recording power Pw 2 is used; and in the section where the ⁇ m T pulse is generated by the Gate 4 , a recording power Pw 3 is used.
  • This arrangement allows the recording power to be controlled independently in each of the first pulse section, the intermediate pulse section group and the last pulse section.
  • the Gate timing is synchronized with the reference clock period T or with a base clock, which is the reference clock period divided by an integer, and that ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 1 are defined by the duty ratio with respect to the base clock.
  • the intermediate pulses are generated, according to n, in numbers equal to the division number stored in the ROM memory.
  • the following description concerns a divided recording pulse generating method based on a clock signal with a period of 2T which is obtained by dividing the reference clock period T.
  • This method has more limitations than the divided recording pulse generating method 1 but has an advantage of allowing for the design of logic circuits based on more regular rules.
  • the pulse generating method 2 is characterized in that the procedure depends on whether the value that n of an nT mark can take is odd or even.
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 ′, ⁇ 1 ′, ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 1 ′, and ⁇ 2 ′ may change according to the value of L.
  • the division number m is set to 1.
  • ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 2 , and ⁇ 1 ′ and ⁇ 2 ′ are adjusted to ensure that each mark length will be precisely nT and to reduce jitters at the ends of the mark. They are normally ⁇ 0.5 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 0.5, ⁇ 0.5 ⁇ 1 ′ ⁇ 0.5, ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2 ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2 ′ ⁇ 1.
  • the correction amounts at the front end and rear end are preferably set equal, i.e.,
  • are each preferably in the range of 0.8 to 1.2.
  • the two recording marks with the same division numbers are preferably formed in such a manner that their mark length difference 1T is about 0.5T at the front end side and about 0.5T at the rear end side. That is,
  • the rear end side is normally
  • the position of the front end of the mark is determined almost by the rising edge of the recording power laser beam at ⁇ 1 T and its jitter is determined by the duty ratio of ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 1 and by the duty ratio of ⁇ 1 ′ and ⁇ 1 ′.
  • the mark rear end position depends on ⁇ 2 (and ⁇ 2 ′), i.e., the value of the divided pulse period ( ⁇ m + ⁇ m )T (and ( ⁇ m ′+ ⁇ m ′)T) at the rear end of the mark and also on the value of the duty ratio of ⁇ m and ⁇ m (and the duty ratio of ⁇ m ′ and ⁇ m ′) Further, the mark rear end position also depends on the position of the falling edge of the recording pulse ⁇ m T (and ⁇ m ′T) at the rear end and on the cooling process of the recording layer before and after that falling edge position.
  • the mark rear end position depends on the value of the off pulse section ⁇ m T (and ⁇ m ′T) at the rear end that has a great effect on the cooling speed of the recording layer.
  • the divided pulse period ( ⁇ m + ⁇ m )T at the rear end does not need to be 0.5T or 1T, and fine adjustment can be made with a resolution power of about 0.1T, preferably 0.05T, or more preferably 0.025T.
  • ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 1 assume fixed values for all L equal to 3 or more.
  • ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 1 be set to 2 as this causes the period ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ i )T to become 2T for all i ranging from 1 to (m ⁇ 1).
  • ⁇ 1 ′ and ⁇ 1 ′ assume fixed values for all L equal to 3 or more.
  • ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 1 be set to 2.5 as this makes it easy to synchronize with the subsequent divided pulse period 2T.
  • ⁇ m , ⁇ m , ⁇ m ′ and ⁇ m ′ each preferably assume the same values for all L equal to 3 or more, specifically 2 or more.
  • n 2 or 3
  • the division number m is 1.
  • the ⁇ 1 ⁇ 1 duty ratio and ⁇ 1 (or the ⁇ 1 ′ ⁇ 1 ′ duty ratio and ⁇ 1 ′) can be adjusted to achieve a desired mark length and jitter.
  • it is desired that ⁇ 1 ′ ⁇ 1 1.
  • the pulse generating circuit should preferably be controlled to ensure that ⁇ 1 (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) is generated in synchronism with a frequency-divided first reference clock 3 with a period 2T which is produced by frequency-dividing a first reference clock 1 with a period T; that ⁇ 1 ′ (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m) is generated in synchronism with a frequency-divided second reference clock 4 with a period 2T which is obtained by frequency-dividing a second reference clock 2 that has the same period T as that of the first reference clock 1 and is shifted 0.5T from the first reference clock 1 ; and that ⁇ 1 ′ rises 2.5T before ⁇ 2 ′ rises.
  • the use of a plurality of reference clocks can simplify the pulse generating circuit.
  • T d1 is a real number between ⁇ 2 and 2. When the value of T d1 is negative, it indicates a advance time.
  • FIG. 12 shows an example relation between recording pulses when the pulse division scheme in the recording method of this invention is implemented by using a plurality of reference clocks described above.
  • the delay times T d1 of ⁇ 1 T and ⁇ 1 ′T with respect to the front end of the nT mark are 0;
  • the recording power in the recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) is Pw which is constant;
  • the bias power in the off pulse section ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) is Pb which is constant;
  • the power of light radiated in the spaces and in other than ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) and ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) is an erase power Pe which is constant.
  • Pb ⁇ Pe ⁇ Pw the delay times T d1 of ⁇ 1 T and ⁇ 1 ′T with respect to the front end of the nT mark are 0;
  • the recording power in the recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) is Pw which is constant;
  • reference number 200 denotes a reference clock with a period T.
  • FIG. 12( a ) shows a pulse waveform corresponding to a recording mark with a length of nT, with reference number 201 representing the length of a 2LT recording mark and 202 representing the length of a (2L+1)T recording mark.
  • a frequency-divided second reference clock 206 with a period 2T is obtained by frequency-dividing a second reference clock 204 with a period T which has a phase shift of 0.5T from the reference clock 200 .
  • the duty ratio of ⁇ 1 ⁇ 1 is adjusted to produce a recording pulse waveform 208 .
  • FIG. 12 the mark lengths 2LT and (2L+1)T are depicted so that their rear ends are aligned at T 2 and T 4 .
  • the reference clocks 205 and 206 both with the period of 2T.
  • the front end positions of these mark lengths can be 1T out of phase with each other.
  • FIGS. 13 ( a ), ( b ), ( c ) and ( d ) there are four possible relations as shown in FIGS. 13 ( a ), ( b ), ( c ) and ( d ). It is therefore desirable to adopt the following gate generating method to deal with this situation.
  • FIG. 13 is a timing chart explaining the above gate generating method.
  • the reference number 300 represents the reference clock with a period T (reference clock for data).
  • the recording system normally makes a phase comparison between the synchronization signal T sync generated at clock marks arranged on the medium for each minimum unit of address (e.g., synchronization signal such as VFO formed as a pit train on the medium and arranged for each sector, and a synchronization pattern arranged for each ATIP frame (every ⁇ fraction (1/75) ⁇ second) formed as a groove meander on the medium) and the T-period reference clock generated in advance in order to establish synchronization.
  • T sync generated at clock marks arranged on the medium for each minimum unit of address
  • synchronization signal such as VFO formed as a pit train on the medium and arranged for each sector
  • a synchronization pattern arranged for each ATIP frame (every ⁇ fraction (1/75) ⁇ second) formed as a groove meander on the medium) and the T-period reference clock generated in advance in order to establish synchronization.
  • FIG. 13 shows an example case in which the front end of the mark appears an even number of periods T after the T sync .
  • An even-numbered length mark 301 with n being even is shown in FIG. 13( a ) and an odd-numbered length mark 304 with n being odd is shown in FIG. 13( d )
  • an even-numbered length mark 302 with n being even is shown in FIG. 13( b )
  • an odd-numbered length mark 303 with n being odd FIG. 13( c )
  • FIGS. 13 ( a ) to 13 ( d ) when reference clocks are generated by shifting them 0.5T from one another in a manner similar to that of FIG. 12, four different clock trains are produced, as indicated by 305 , 306 , 307 and 308 . That is, with the reference clock 305 taken as a reference, the clock 307 is shifted by 0.5T, the clock 306 is shifted by 1T, and the clock 308 is shifted by 1.5T. These clocks are all formed by frequency-dividing the T-period reference clock having its origin at T sync and then shifting their phases by 0.5T from one another In the case of FIG.
  • the recording pulse generating gate groups G 1 a, G 1 b, G 2 a and G 2 b are identical to the Gate 1 , Gate 2 and Gate 4 combined in FIG. 1. That is, in FIG. 1, the Gate 1 for generating the first pulse ⁇ 1 T, the Gate 2 for generating the intermediate pulse group ⁇ 1 T (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1), and the Gate 4 for generating the last pulse ⁇ m T are produced separately and then combined to generate the gate groups G 1 a and G 1 b. In FIG. 1, the first pulse ⁇ 1 ′T, the intermediate pulse group ⁇ 1 ′T (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1), and the last pulse ⁇ m ′T are produced separately and then combined to generate the gate groups G 2 a and G 2 b.
  • Generating the first pulse independently as with the Gate 1 of FIG. 1 can deal with the situation where ( ⁇ 1 ′+ ⁇ 1 ′) is 2.5 when n is odd, by generating the gate for ⁇ 1 ′T in synchronism with the front end of nT and generating the 2T-period intermediate pulse group ⁇ 1 ′T with a delay of 2.5T. This is equivalent to setting the T d2 for Gate 2 in FIG. 1 to 2.5T (when there is a delay T d1 , another delay T d1 is made).
  • the gate groups G 1 a, G 1 b, G 2 a and G 2 b are selected as follows. First, with T sync taken a reference, the starting point of the T-period reference clock 300 is determined, and it is checked whether the mark length nT rises an even number of clock periods T or an odd number of clock periods T after the starting point. More specifically, a 1-bit adder is used which is reset at T sync and adds 1 every period. If the result is 0, it is decided that the elapsed time is determined to be an even number of periods; and if the result is 1, the elapsed time is determined to be an odd number of periods.
  • the gate signal group G 1 a or G 2 b is selected depending on whether n is even or odd. If the elapsed time from the reference time T sync to the front end of the nT mark is an odd number times the period T, then the gate signal group G 1 b or G 2 a is selected depending on whether n is even or odd. It is therefore possible to generate all the recording pulses in a series of nT marks which are generated, with T 0 as a starting point, by using combinations of the four 2T-period reference clocks shifted 0.5T from one another.
  • the gate signals are generated depending on whether n is even or odd, that is, a gate G 3 of ⁇ ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 1 ) is generated with a delay time of T d1 when n is even; and a gate G 4 of ⁇ ( ⁇ 1 ′+ ⁇ 1 ′) is generated with a delay time of T d1 when n is odd, to radiate light with different powers according to the following conditions.
  • the gate priority relationship described above is determined by matching the gate on/off to logical 0 and 1 levels and performing an OR operation on each gate controlling logical signal.
  • FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 represent a case where, for simplicity, the rising edge of the first recording pulse ⁇ 1 T, ⁇ 1 ′T is at the front end of the nT mark, i.e., concurrent with the front end of the nT mark being recorded. If the mark has a delay, it is preferred in terms of keeping the space length at a desired value that the rising edges of ⁇ 1 T and ⁇ 1 ′T be provided with the same delay T d1 .
  • the following description concerns another example of the divided recording pulse generating method based on a 2T-period clock signal which is obtained by dividing the reference clock period T.
  • This method allows for the design of logic circuits based on more regular rules than those employed in the divided recording pulse generating method 1 .
  • the procedure depends on whether the value the n of an nT mark can take is odd or even.
  • the correction of the mark length difference 1T between an even-numbered length mark and an odd-numbered length mark, both having the same number of divisions is distributed and allocated to the first and last recording pulse periods.
  • the correction of the mark length difference 1T is done by adjusting the off pulse length ⁇ i T (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) in the intermediate divided recording pulse group.
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ m ⁇ 1 , ⁇ m , ⁇ 1 ′, ⁇ 2 ′, ⁇ m ⁇ 1 and ⁇ m ′ satisfy the following equation.
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 ′, ⁇ 1 ′, T d1 , T d1 ′, ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 ′, ⁇ 2 ′ and ⁇ 3 ′ can vary according to L.
  • T d1 and T d1 ′ are delay or advance times from the starting end of the nT mark in the mark length-modulated original signal until the first recording pulse ⁇ 1 T rises. They are real numbers normally between ⁇ 2 and 2. The positive values of T d1 and T d1 ′ signify delays. T d1 and T d1 ′ are preferably set almost constant regardless of the value of L.
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 ′ and ⁇ 1 ′ are real numbers normally between 0 and 2, preferably between 0.5 and 1.5.
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 ′, ⁇ 2 ′ and ⁇ 3 ′ are real numbers normally between ⁇ 1 and 1, preferably between ⁇ 0.5 and 0.5. These are used, as required, as correction values for realizing precise mark lengths or space lengths in the divided pulse periods ( ⁇ 1-1 + ⁇ 1 )T that form the period 2T.
  • the division number m is set to 7.
  • the period ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 2 )T and the period ( ⁇ m ⁇ 1 + ⁇ m )T are each increased or decreased by 0.5T to adjust their lengths.
  • What is important in the mark length recording is the mark end position and the jitter that are determined by the waveform of the front and rear ends of the mark.
  • the intermediate portion of the mark does not have a great effect on the jitter at the ends of the mark as long as the correct amplitude of the intermediate portion is obtained.
  • the above adjusting method takes advantage of the fact that as long as the mark does not appear optically divided, if the recording pulse period in the intermediate portion of the mark is extended or reduced by 0.5T, the mark length only increases or decreases by the corresponding amount and does not greatly affect the jitter at the ends of the mark.
  • 2T is taken as the base recording pulse period for any mark length.
  • the duty ratio of ⁇ 1 ⁇ 1 can be optimized for each mark length or for each i, but it is preferred that the following restrictions be provided for the simplification of the recording pulse generating circuit.
  • the rear end position of the mark depends not only on the trailing edge position of the last recording pulse ⁇ m T (or ⁇ m ′T) but also on the cooling process of the recording layer temperature before and after the mark rear end position.
  • the values of T d1 , ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 ′, ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 1 ′, ⁇ m , ⁇ m ′, ⁇ m and ⁇ m ′ can be finely adjusted in the range of about ⁇ 20% to correct the heat interference according to marks or spaces immediately before or after the mark being recorded.
  • the expression “about 0.5” or “about 1” means that the fine adjustment of that degree is allowed.
  • ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 1 ′ are made constant and independent of i for the i value of 2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1. That is,
  • the expression “L is 3 or more” is the condition to establish that the division number is 3 or more and there is one or more intermediate divided recording pulses excluding first and last divided pulses.
  • ⁇ m and ⁇ m ′ be set to the same values of ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 1 ′ for 2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1.
  • the falling edge of at least ⁇ 2 T or ⁇ 2 ′T in the intermediate divided recording pulse group is produced precisely the delay time of 4T or 4.5T after the starting end of the nT mark. Therefore, at least the intermediate divided recording pulse group can be generated in synchronism with the 2T-period reference clock, which was generated by frequency-dividing the T-period reference data clock in advance.
  • FIG. 24 shows the relation between the recording pulses when the recording pulse dividing method of this invention is implemented by combining a plurality of 2T-period reference clocks.
  • the recording power Pw of light radiated during the recording pulse sections, the bias power Pb of light radiated during the off pulse sections, and the erase power Pe of light radiated during other than these sections are each shown to be constant for any i.
  • these powers are shown to have the relationship of Pb ⁇ Pe ⁇ Pw 1 these powers may be set to different values depending on the values of n and i.
  • reference number 220 represents a T-period reference clock.
  • FIG. 24( a ) shows square waves associated with the nT mark of the original mark length modulation signal, with 221 representing a mark 2LT in length and 222 representing a mark (2L +1)T in length.
  • 221 representing a mark 2LT in length
  • 222 representing a mark (2L +1)T in length.
  • the 2T-period reference clock 225 is obtained by frequency-dividing a T-period reference clock 223 which has no phase delay with respect to the T-period reference clock 220 .
  • T d1 + ⁇ 1 2
  • the falling edge of each recording pulse ⁇ 1 T (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) is synchronized with the 2T-period reference clock 225 .
  • the duty ratio of ⁇ 1 ⁇ 1 is adjusted to produce a recording pulse waveform 227 .
  • a 2T-period reference clock 226 is obtained by frequency-dividing a T-period reference clock 224 which is 0.5T out of phase with the T-period reference clock 220 .
  • the falling edge of each recording pulse ⁇ 1 ′T (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m) is synchronized with the 2T-period reference clock 226 .
  • the duty ratio of ⁇ 1-1 ⁇ 1 is adjusted to produce a recording pulse waveform 228 .
  • the mark lengths 2LT and (2L+1)T are depicted to have their rear ends align with each other at T 2 and T 4 .
  • the front end positions of these mark lengths can be 1T out of phase with each other although they are in phase with the 2T period.
  • the divided recording pulse generating method 3 needs also to consider, as in the divided recording pulse generating method 2 , the fact that there are four possible relations considering the cases of n being even and n being odd as shown in FIGS. 13 ( a ), ( b ), ( c ) and ( d ).
  • a gate group G 1 a corresponding to the recording pulse sections ⁇ 1 T, ⁇ 2 T, ⁇ 3 T, ⁇ 4 T, ⁇ 5 T is generated in synchronism with each of the periods P 1 a, P 2 a, P 3 a, P 4 a, P 5 a;
  • a gate group G 1 b corresponding to the recording pulses ⁇ 1 T, ⁇ 2 T, ⁇ 3 T, ⁇ 4 T, ⁇ 5 T is generated in synchronism with each of the periods P 1 b, P 2 b, P 3 b, P 4 b, P 5 b;
  • a gate group G 2 a corresponding to the recording pulses ⁇ 1 ′T, ⁇ 2 ′T, ⁇ 3 ′T, ⁇ 4 ′T, ⁇ 5 ′T is
  • These recording pulse generating gate groups G 1 a, G 1 b, G 2 a, G 2 b are identical to the combinations of Gate 1 , 2 , and 4 in FIG. 1, as in the case of the divided recording pulse generating method 2 .
  • the Gate 1 for generating the first pulse ⁇ 1 T, the Gate 2 for generating the intermediate pulse group ⁇ 1 T (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1), and the Gate 4 for generating the last pulse ⁇ m T are separately generated and then combined.
  • the first pulse ⁇ 1 ′T, the intermediate pulse group ⁇ 1 ′T (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1), and the last pulse ⁇ m ′T are separately produced and then combined.
  • the first recording pulses ⁇ 1 T, ⁇ 1 ′T may be given a predetermined time difference of period P 1 a, Q 1 a, P 1 b or Q 1 b, and the last recording pulses ⁇ m T, ⁇ m ′T are given a predetermined time difference of either period P 5 a, P 5 b, Q 5 a or Q 5 b.
  • the last off pulse section ⁇ m T of the mark is irregular. That is, the period of the rear end of the mark is not necessarily 2T and must be given a margin of about 2T ⁇ 1T. This can be dealt with by defining the last off pulse ⁇ m or ⁇ m ′ exceptionally. For that purpose, the gate signal corresponding to the Gate 3 of FIG. 1 is generated.
  • a gate G 3 of ⁇ ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ )T is generated with a delay time T d1 from the front end of the nT mark; and when n is odd, a gate G 4 of ⁇ ( ⁇ 1 ′+ ⁇ 1 ′)T is generated with a delay time T d1 ′ from the front end of the nT mark.
  • all the gates for generating the recording pulse sections ⁇ 1 T can be produced by the following procedure.
  • a reference time T sync corresponding to the clock mark formed at a predetermined position on the recording track is generated;
  • four reference clocks are generated: a 2T-period reference clock 1 a produced at the reference time T sync as a starting point, a 2T-period reference clock 2 a produced 0.5T in advance of the reference clock 1 a, 2T-period reference clock 1 b produced 1T in advance of the reference clock 1 a, and a 2T-period reference clock 2 b produced 1.5T in advance of the reference clock 1 a;
  • the gate groups G 1 a, G 1 b, G 2 a, G 2 b can be selected as follows. First, it is checked whether the mark length nT rises an even number of clock periods T or an odd number of clock periods T after the reference time T sync as a start point. More specifically, a 1-bit adder is used which is reset at T sync and adds 1 every period. If the result is 0, it is decided that the elapsed time is determined to be an even number of periods; and if the result is 1, the elapsed time is determined to be an odd number of periods.
  • the gate signal group G 1 a or G 2 b is selected depending on whether n is even or odd. If the elapsed time from the reference time T sync to the front end of the nT mark is an odd number times the period T, then the gate signal group G 1 b or G 2 a is selected depending on whether n is even or odd. It is therefore possible to generate all the recording pulses in a series of nT marks which are generated, with T 0 as a starting point, by using combinations of the four 2T-period reference clocks shifted 0.5T from one another.
  • the optical recording method of this invention is particularly effective for a phase change medium in which information is overwritten by forming an amorphous mark on a crystal-state medium, the crystal state being taken as an unrecorded or erased state.
  • the optical recording method of this invention is also effective in cases where the recording is made on the same medium at different linear velocities.
  • a constant density recording is commonly practiced, which does not depend on the linear velocity but keeps a product of vT at a plurality of linear velocities constant, where v is a linear velocity and T is a clock period.
  • the pulse generation method 2 keeps the periods of ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 1 )T and ( ⁇ 1 ′+ ⁇ 1 ′)T for 2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1 constant irrespective of the linear velocity, also keeps Pw 1 , Pb 1 and Pe for each i almost constant irrespective of the linear velocity, and reduces ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 1 ′ (1 ⁇ i ⁇ m) as the linear velocity becomes slower (JP-A 9-7176). As a result, a satisfactory overwrite is made possible in a wide range of linear velocity.
  • the pulse generation method 3 keeps the periods of ( ⁇ 1-1 + ⁇ 1 )T and ( ⁇ 1-1 ′+ ⁇ 1 ′)T for 2 ⁇ i ⁇ m constant irrespective of the linear velocity, also keeps Pw 1 , Pb 1 and Pe for each i almost constant irrespective of the linear velocity, and monotonously reduces ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 1 ′ as the linear velocity becomes slower (JP-A 9-7176). In this case, too, a satisfactory overwrite is made possible in a wide range of linear velocity.
  • the expression “Pw 1 , Pb 1 and Pe are almost constant irrespective of the linear velocity” means that the minimum value is within about 20% of the maximum value, more preferably within 10%. Still more preferably, Pw 1 , Pb 1 and Pe are virtually constant, not dependent of the linear velocity at all.
  • the method of reducing ⁇ 1 and increasing ⁇ 1 in ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 1 )T and reducing ⁇ 1 and increasing ⁇ i-1 in ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ i )T as the linear velocity decreases is particularly effective in the phase change medium. This is because in the phase change medium, the cooling speed of the recording layer becomes slower as the linear velocity decreases and it is necessary to accelerate the cooling effect by increasing the ratio of the off pulse section ⁇ 1 .
  • ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 1 ′ be set to 0.5 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2.5 and 0.5 ⁇ 1 ′ ⁇ 2.5, more preferably 1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2 and 1 ⁇ 1 ′ ⁇ 2, to secure the cooling time to change the medium into the amorphous state.
  • ⁇ 1 T and ⁇ 1 ′T (2 ⁇ i ⁇ m ⁇ 1) be held constant, i.e., the intermediate recording pulses have almost constant absolute lengths of time.
  • the expression “almost constant” means that they have a variation range of about ⁇ 0.1T at each linear velocity. In that case, the reference clock T becomes large as the linear velocity decreases, so ⁇ 1 and ⁇ 1 ′ in the intermediate pulse group necessarily decrease monotonously.
  • the first recording pulse sections ⁇ 1 T, ⁇ 1 ′T can be made constant, they should preferably be finely adjusted at each linear velocity.
  • the ⁇ m and ⁇ m ′ are preferably fine-adjusted at each linear velocity. In that case, it is preferred that ⁇ m and ⁇ m ′ be set constant or made to increase as the linear velocity decreases.
  • n ⁇ ( ⁇ 1 + ⁇ 2 ) and the first and last pulses should preferably be controlled according to the preceding and/or subsequent mark lengths or space lengths.
  • a first case is where the linear velocity during the recording is set as high as 10 m/s or more and the shortest mark length as small as 0.8 ⁇ m or less in order to perform high density recording. Because the shortest mark length is expressed as nT ⁇ V where V is the linear velocity, the reduced shortest mark length results in the reference clock period T being shortened.
  • the wavelength of the recording light is also effective to set the wavelength of the recording light to as short as 500 nm or less, the numerical aperture of the lens for focusing the recording light to as high as 0.6 or more, the beam diameter of the recording light to a small value, and the shortest mark length to as small as 0.3 ⁇ m or less to perform high density recording.
  • mark length modulation scheme is an EFM modulation scheme and the linear velocity during recording is set to a very high speed of 10 times the CD reference linear velocity of 1.2 m/s to 1.4 m/s while keeping the recording line density constant during the recording.
  • the mark length modulation scheme is an EFM+ modulation scheme
  • the high density recording scheme and the linear velocity during recording is set to as high as two or more times the DVD reference linear velocity of 3.49 m/s while keeping the recording line density constant during the recording.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing retrieved waveforms (eye-pattern) of the EFM modulation signal used in the CD family including Cd-RW.
  • the recording mark and space lengths can take a time length of between 3T and 11T and the eye-pattern virtually randomly includes retrieved waveforms of all amorphous marks from 3T to 11T.
  • the EFM+ modulation further includes a mark length of 14T and a space length of 14T.
  • the upper end I top of the eye-pattern converted into the reflectance is an upper end value R top
  • m 11 is preferably set between 40% and 80% and it is particularly important to set m 11 to 40% or more. It is preferred that the signal amplitude be set large, but too large a signal amplitude will result in the gain of the amplifier of the signal reproducing system becoming excessively saturated. So, the upper limit of m 11 , is set at around 80%. Too small a signal amplitude on the other hand will reduce the signal-noise ratio (SN ratio) and thus the lower limit is set at around 40%.
  • SN ratio signal-noise ratio
  • asymmetry value Asym ( I slice I 11 - 1 2 ) ⁇ ( % ) ( 2 )
  • the jitter of each mark and space of the retrieved signal be almost 10% or less of the reference clock period T and that the mark length and space length have nearly nT ⁇ V (T is a reference clock period of data, n is an integer from 3 to 11, and v is a linear velocity during reproduction).
  • T is a reference clock period of data
  • n is an integer from 3 to 11
  • v is a linear velocity during reproduction.
  • equations (1) and (2) are defined by replacing I 11 with an amplitude I 14 of a 14T mark.
  • the jitter is measured as a so-called edge-to-clock jitter, which is obtained by passing an analog retrieved signal through an equalizer to digitize it.
  • the value of jitter is preferably 13% or less of the clock period, particularly 9% or less.
  • Optical recording mediums recorded according to this invention include a pigment-based organic recording medium, a magnetooptical recording medium, a phase change recording medium and various other types of recording mediums. They also include a write-once and rewritable mediums. Of these mediums, the one that can produce a particularly significant effect is the phase change recording medium, particularly a rewritable phase change recording medium in which an amorphous mark is overwritten on a crystal-state medium, the crystal state being taken as an unrecorded state.
  • a particularly preferred material of the recording layer is of a type in which crystallization initiates at an interface between a crystal area and a melted area.
  • phase change mediums are those having a recording layer containing still more excessive Sb in the SbTe eutectic composition.
  • a particularly preferred composition is the one which contains excessive Sb and also Ge in the base Sb 70 Te 30 eutectic composition.
  • the Sb/Te ratio is particularly preferably set to 4 or more.
  • the content of Ge is preferably 10 atomic % or less.
  • Such a recording layer is a M z Ge y (Sb x Te 1-x ) 1-y-z alloy (where 0 ⁇ z ⁇ 0.1, 0 ⁇ y ⁇ 0.3, 0.8 ⁇ x; and M is at least one of In, Ga, Si, Sn, Pb, Pd, Pt, Zn, Au, Ag, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Co, Mo, Mn, Bi, O, N and S).
  • the alloy with the above composition is a binary alloy containing excessive Sb at the Sb 70 Te 3 -eutectic point and which contains Ge for for improving the time-dependent stability and jitter, and also contains at least one of the series of elements represented by M for further reduction of jitter and improvement of linear velocity dependency and optical characteristics.
  • a composition with the Te amount close to zero can be regarded as an alloy that has Te or M element added in the composition near the Ge 15 Sb 85 eutectic point.
  • Ge acts to enhance the time-dependent stability of the amorphous mark without degrading the high speed crystallization function offered by excess Sb. It is considered to have a capability to raise the crystallization temperature and enhance the activation energy for crystallization. That is, the above-mentioned alloy recording layer consisting mainly of GeSbTe in the base SbTe eutectic composition can increase the Sb/Te ratio while suppressing the formation of crystal nucleus by the presence of Ge and thereby increase the speed of crystal growth. Generally, the forming of crystal nucleus initiates at a lower temperature than that of the crystal growth and this is not desirable to the storage stability of the mark at around the room temperature when amorphous marks are formed.
  • the alloy recording layer with the above GeSbTe as a main component because the crystal growth at near the melting point is selectively promoted, this alloy is capable of quick erasure and has an excellent stability of the amorphous mark at room temperature. In this sense, the alloy recording layer described above is particularly suited for high linear velocity recording.
  • a more preferred composition of the recording layer of the phase change medium is A 1 a A 2 b Ge c (Sb d Te 1-d ) 1-a-b-c alloy (where 0 ⁇ a ⁇ 0.1, 0 ⁇ b ⁇ 0.1, 0.02 ⁇ c ⁇ 0.3, 0.8 ⁇ d; A 1 is at least one of Zn, Pd, Pt, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Co, Si, Sn, Pb, Bi, N, O and S; and A 2 is In and/or Ga).
  • compositions are preferable because, compared with the composition near the conventional GeTe—Sb 2 Te 3 pseudo-binary alloy, the reflectance of individual fine crystal grains has a smaller dependency on the direction of crystal plane, providing these compositions with the ability to reduce noise.
  • the SbTe-based composition with the above Sb/Te ratio higher than 80/20 is excellent in that it is capable of quick erasure at high linear velocities equal to or more than 12 times the CD linear velocity (about 14 m/s) or 4 times the DVD linear velocity (about 14 m/s).
  • the erasure of the amorphous mark in the above composition is virtually governed only by the crystal growth from the boundary with the crystal area surrounding the amorphous mark, and the formation of a crystal nucleus inside the amorphous mark and the process of crystal growth from the crystal nucleus hardly contribute to the recrystallization process.
  • the linear velocity increases (e.g., to more than 10 m/s)
  • the time that the erase power Pe is irradiated becomes short, extremely reducing the time that the layer is kept at a high temperature around the melting point necessary for the crystal growth.
  • the increased content of Sb also increases the crystal growth speed during the re-solidifying of the melted area. That is, increasing the Sb content to ensure the quick erasure of the amorphous mark during the high linear velocity recording makes the formation of good amorphous marks difficult.
  • the speed of recrystallization from around the amorphous mark is increased above a certain level, the recrystallization from around the melted area during the re-solidifying of the melted area formed to record the amorphous mark is also accelerated.
  • the composition problem described above is considered relatively not so large with the commonly used conventional GeTe—Sb 2 Te 3 pseudo-binary alloy-based composition.
  • the erasure of the amorphous mark is effected mostly by the formation of crystal nuclei within the amorphous mark and not very much by the crystal growth. Further, the formation of crystal nuclei is more active than the crystal growth at low temperatures.
  • the recrystallization can be achieved by generating a large number of crystal nuclei even when the crystal growth is relatively slow. Further, during the process of re-solidification at temperatures below the melting point, the crystal nuclei are not generated and the speed of crystal growth is relatively small, so that the recording layer is easily transformed into the amorphous state at a relatively small critical cooling speed.
  • the recording layer having a composition containing excess Sb in the SbTe eutectic composition, particularly a composition further including Ge, should preferably have a crystal state consisting of a virtually single phase, not accompanied by phase separation.
  • the crystal state can be obtained by performing an initialization operation, which involves heating and crystallizing the recording layer of amorphous state produced at an initial phase of the film deposition process using sputtering.
  • the expression “virtually single phase” means that the recording layer may be formed of a single crystal phase or a plurality of crystal phases and that when it is formed of a plurality of crystal phases, it preferably has no lattice mismatch. When it is formed of a single crystal phase, the recording layer may be multiple crystal layers of the same crystal phase but with different orientations.
  • the recording layer of such a virtually single phase can improve characteristics, such as reduced noise, an improved storage stability and a greater ease with which crystallization can be effected at high speed.
  • characteristics such as reduced noise, an improved storage stability and a greater ease with which crystallization can be effected at high speed.
  • This may be explained as follows.
  • various crystal phases including a crystal phase of a hexagonal structure, a cubic crystal such as Sb but with a largely differing lattice constant, a face-centered cubic crystal such as found in AgSbTe2, and other crystal phases belonging to other space groups, exist in a mixed state, a grain boundary with a large lattice mismatch is formed. This is considered to cause disturbances to the peripheral geometry of the mark and also produce optical noise.
  • a grain boundary is not formed.
  • the type of crystal phase formed in the recording layer depends largely on the initialization method performed on the recording layer. That is, to produce a preferred crystal phase in this invention, the recording layer initializing method should preferably incorporate the following provisions.
  • the recording layer is normally formed by a physical vacuum deposition such as sputtering.
  • the as-deposited state immediately after the film is formed normally is an amorphous state and thus should be crystallized to assume an unrecorded/erased state.
  • This operation is called an initialization.
  • the initialization operation includes, for example, an oven annealing in a solid phase in a temperature range from the crystallization temperature (normally 150-300° C.) up to the melting point, an annealing using light energy irradiation by a laser beam and light of a flash lamp, and an initialization by melting.
  • the melting initialization is preferred. In the case of annealing in the solid phase there is a time margin for establishing a thermal equilibrium and thus other crystal phases are likely to be formed.
  • the melting crystallization it is possible to melt the recording layer and then directly recrystallize it during the re-solidification process. Or, it is possible to change the recording layer to the amorphous state during the re-solidification process and then recrystallize it in solid phase at near the melting point. In that case, when the crystallization speed is too slow, it may bring about a time margin for the thermal equilibrium to be established thereby forming other crystal phases. Therefore it is preferred that the cooling speed be increased to some extent.
  • the time during which to hold the recording layer above the melting point is preferably set normally to 2 ⁇ s or less, more preferably 1 ⁇ s or less.
  • a laser beam is preferably used for the melting initialization. It is particularly desirable for the initialization to use a laser beam which is elliptical with its minor axis oriented almost parallel in the direction of scan (this initialization method may hereinafter be referred to as a “bulk erase”).
  • the length of major axis is normally 10-1,000 ⁇ m and the minor axis normally 0.1-10 ⁇ m.
  • the lengths of major axis and minor axis of the beam are defined as a half width of the light energy intensity distribution measured within the beam.
  • the scan speed is normally about 3-10 m/s.
  • the area that was melted during the initialization scan may be transformed into the amorphous state.
  • scanning at speeds 30% or more lower than the maximum usable linear velocity generally causes a phase separation, making it difficult to produce a single phase.
  • a scan speed 50-80% of the maximum usable linear velocity is particularly preferred.
  • the maximum usable linear velocity itself is determined as the upper limit of a linear velocity that can assure a complete erasure when the medium is irradiated with the Pe power at that linear velocity.
  • a laser beam source may use a semiconductor laser, a gas laser and others.
  • the power of the leaser beam is normally between approximately 100 mW and 2 W.
  • the melting initialization may also be accomplished by using two laser beams, melting the recording layer with a preceding beam, and recrystallizing the recording layer with the second beam. If the distance between the two beams is long, the area melted by the preceding beam solidifies first before being recrystallized by the second beam.
  • Whether the melting/recrystallization has been performed or not can be determined by checking whether a reflectance R1 of the erased state, after the recording layer has been actually overwritten with an amorphous mark by the recording light about 1 ⁇ m across, is virtually equal to a reflectance R2 of the unrecorded state after initialization.
  • a reflectance R1 of the erased state after the recording layer has been actually overwritten with an amorphous mark by the recording light about 1 ⁇ m across
  • R2 of the unrecorded state after initialization.
  • the above erased state may be obtained, rather than by modulating the focused recording laser beam according to the actual recorded pulse generation method, but by irradiating the recording power DC-wise to melt the recording layer and then resolidifying it.
  • the difference between R1 and R2 is preferably set as small as possible.
  • a value involving R1 and R2 which is defined as follows be set 10(%) or less, particularly 5(%) or less. 2 ⁇ ⁇ R1 - R2 ⁇ R1 + R2 ⁇ 100 ⁇ ( % )
  • R2 needs to be in the range of 16-18%.
  • the single crystal phase obtained by such an initialization method generally tends to be a hexagonal crystal when the Sb/Te ratio is larger than approximately 4.5 and a face-centered cubic crystal when the Sb/Te ratio is less than 4.5. But this does not depend only on the Sb/Te ratio.
  • the recording layer be made of a single phase of hexagonal polycrystal.
  • the phase change medium of this invention normally has formed on the substrate a lower protective layer, a phase change recording layer, an upper protective layer and a reflection layer. It is particularly preferred to form a so-called rapid cooling structure in which the recording layer is 10-30 nm thick, the upper protective layer is 15-50 nm thick and the reflection layer is 30-300 nm thick.
  • n/m associated with the time lengths of all recording marks should preferably be set to 1.5 or more. Further, n/m is more preferably 1.8 or more.
  • the upper limit of n/m normally is approximately 4, preferably approximately 3, but can change depending on other conditions such as the recording power Pw and the bias power Pb. Basically, n/m needs only to fall in a range that gives a sufficient time length for cooling.
  • the recording method of this invention does not depend on the layer structure of the recording medium or the light radiating method, and can be applied not only to a medium which has a layer structure of substrate/protective layer/recording layer/protective layer/reflection layer and in which a retrieve/write laser beam is radiated through the substrate but also to a so-called film-side incident type medium which has a layer structure of substrate/reflection layer/protective layer/recording layer/protective layer and in which the retrieve/write laser beam is radiated from the side opposite the substrate. Further, the recording method of this invention can also be applied to a medium that combines these mediums to form multiple recording layers.
  • the reflection layer has a function of promoting heat dissipation and enhancing the cooling speed.
  • the selection of the reflection layer is important. Specifically, it is preferred in this invention that a reflection layer used have a high heat dissipating effect.
  • the thermal conductivity of the reflection layer is considered to be nearly inversely proportional to its volume resistivity and the heat dissipating effect of the reflection layer is proportional to the film thickness. So, the heat dissipating effect of the reflection layer is considered generally to be inversely proportional to the sheet resistivity.
  • a reflection layer with a sheet resistivity of 0.5 ⁇ / ⁇ or less, particularly 0.4 ⁇ / ⁇ or less, is preferably used.
  • the volume resistivity is preferably in the range of between approximately 20 n ⁇ m and 100 n ⁇ m. A material with too small a volume resistivity is practically not usable. A material with too large a volume resistivity tends not only to have a poor heat dissipating effect but to degrade the recording sensitivity.
  • Possible materials for the reflection layer include aluminum, silver and alloys of these materials as main components.
  • Examples of aluminum alloy that can be used for the reflection layer are aluminum alloys having added to Al at least one of Ta, Ti, Co, Cr, Si, Sc, Hf, Pd, Pt, Mg, Zr, Mo and Mn.
  • the contents of the additive elements are normally between 0.2 atomic % and 1 atomic %. When these contents are too small, hillock resistance tends to be insufficient; and when they are too large, the heat dissipating effect tends to deteriorate.
  • Examples of silver alloy that can be used for the reflection layer are silver alloys having added to Ag at least one of Ti, V, Ta, Nb, W, Co, Cr, Si, Ge, Sn, Sc, Hf, Pd, Rh, Au, Pt, Mg, Zr, Mo and Mn.
  • the additive elements are preferably at least one of Ti, Mg, Pd and Cu metal elements in terms of enhancing the time-dependent stability.
  • the contents of the additive elements are normally between 0.2 atomic % and 3 atomic %. When these contents are too small, the corrosion resistance tends to deteriorate; and when they are too large, the heat dissipating effect tends to deteriorate.
  • volume resistivity increases in proportion to the contents of the added elements in the Al alloy and to the contents of the added elements in the Ag alloy.
  • the reflection layer is normally formed by sputtering and vacuum deposition methods. Because the total amount of impurities in the reflection layer, including water and oxygen trapped therein during the film making, should preferably be 2 atomic % or less, it is desired that the vacuum level in the process chamber used for forming the layer be set to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 Pa or less. To reduce the amount of impurities trapped, the deposition rate is preferably set to 1 nm/sec or higher, particularly 10 nm/sec or higher. The amount of impurities trapped also depends on the method of manufacture of an alloy target used in the sputtering and on the sputter gas (rare gas such as Ar, Ne and Xe).
  • the material of the reflection layer preferably consists of only aluminum and silver, as practically as possible.
  • the reflection layer may be formed in multiple layers to increase the heat dissipating effect and the reliability of the medium.
  • the reflection layer is made mainly of silver which has a large heat dissipating effect and a protective layer containing sulfur is provided between the reflection layer and the recording layer
  • the influences of silver and sulfur may pose problems with the repetitive overwrite characteristic and with a corrosion resistance under an accelerated test environment at high temperature and humidity.
  • an interface layer formed of an aluminum-based alloy can be provided between these two layers so that a 2-layer reflection layer consisting of an aluminum layer and a silver layer can be obtained.
  • the thickness of the interface layer is normally between approximately 5 nm and 100 nm, preferably between 5 nm and 50 nm.
  • Forming the reflection layer in multiple layers is effective also for obtaining a desired sheet resistivity at a desired thickness of layer.
  • a (ZnS) 80 (SiO 2 ) 20 protective layer was deposited to a thickness of 70 nm, a Ge 5 Sb 77 Te 18 recording layer to 17 nm, a (ZnS) 85 (SiO 2 ) 15 protective layer to 40 nm, and an Al 99.5 Ta 0.5 alloy to 220 nm by sputtering in the vacuum chamber.
  • An ultraviolet curing protective coat was applied over this substrate to a thickness of 4 ⁇ m and cured to manufacture a phase change type rewritable optical disk.
  • This rewritable disk was subjected to the initial crystallization process using a bulk eraser with a laser waveform of 810 nm and a beam diameter of about 108 ⁇ m ⁇ 1.5 ⁇ m at a power of 420 mW. Further in an evaluation apparatus having a laser wavelength of 780 nm and a pickup numerical aperture NA of 0.55, the grooves and the lands were crystallized once with a DC light of 9.5 mW by activating a servo to reduce noise of the crystal level.
  • the grooves were overwritten with an EFM modulation random pattern under the conditions: linear velocity of 12 m/s ( ⁇ 10-speed of CD), base clock frequency of 43.1 MHz, and reference clock period T of 23.1 nanoseconds.
  • the EFM modulation scheme uses marks having time lengths ranging from 3T to 11T. Apattern in which these marks with different mark time lengths are randomly generated is an EFM modulation random pattern.
  • Retrieving was done at a speed of 2.4 m/s ( ⁇ 2-speed of CD) and the retrieve signal was passed through a 2-kHz high frequency pass filter and then DC-sliced and retrieve by taking the center of the signal amplitude as a threshold value.
  • the pulse division scheme was optimized in each of the mark time lengths ranging from 3T to 11T. Specifically, the first recording pulse section ⁇ 1 T and the last off pulse section ⁇ m T were optimized.
  • the pulse division scheme of FIG. 9 was used to overwrite the amorphous marks in the crystal area.
  • the measurements of the mark time lengths of the retrieve signals for individual input signals of nT marks are shown in FIG. 10.
  • the mark length change was linear and the mark length deviation of the retrieve marks was in a range that allows the 3T-11T marks to be correctly distinguished and detected.
  • the jitter value here was low, well below the CD standard's jitter upper limit of 17.5 nanoseconds for the ⁇ 2-speed reproduction, and the modulation was 0.6 or higher. This indicates that the recording signal thus obtained was satisfactory.
  • the mark length refers to a mark time length and the space length refers to a space time length.
  • the EFM random signal was overwritten.
  • the random signal was generated using AWG520 manufactured by Sony Techtronix.
  • the pulse division was optimized for each mark length. As a result, even when the random signals were generated, desired mark lengths and satisfactory mark length jitter and space length jitter below 17.5 ns were obtained during the reproduction at ⁇ 2-speed.
  • a (ZnS) 80 (SiO 2 ) 20 protective layer was deposited to a thickness of 70 nm, a Ge 7 Sb 79 Te 14 recording layer to 17 nm, a (ZnS) 85 (SiO 2 ) 15 protective layer to 40 nm, and an Al 99.5 Ta 0.5 alloy to 220 nm by sputtering in the vacuum chamber.
  • An ultraviolet curing protective coat was applied over this substrate to a thickness of 4 ⁇ m and cured to manufacture an optical disk.
  • This rewritable disk was subjected to the initial crystallization process using a bulk eraser with a laser waveform of 810 nm and a beam diameter of about 108 ⁇ m ⁇ 1.5 ⁇ m at a power of 420 mW. Further in an evaluation apparatus having a laser waveform of 780 nm and a pickup numerical aperture NA of 0.55, the grooves and the lands were crystallized once with a DC light of 9.5 mW by activating a servo to reduce noise of the crystal level.
  • the grooves were recorded with amorphous marks 11T in time length by using the pulse division scheme shown in FIG. 6( c ) under the conditions: linear velocity of 19.2 m/s ( ⁇ 16-speed of CD), base clock frequency of 69.1 MHz, and reference clock period T of 14.5 nanoseconds.
  • the retrieving was performed at 2.4 m/s ( ⁇ 2-speed of CD) and the retrieved signal was passed through a 2-kHz high frequency pass filter and then DC-sliced and retrieve by taking the center of the signal amplitude as a threshold value.
  • the mark jitter was 13.1 nanoseconds and the space jitter 13.2 nanoseconds, well below the CD standard's jitter upper limit of 17.5 nanoseconds.
  • a (ZnS) 80 (SiO 2 ) 20 protective layer was deposited to a thickness of 70 nm, a Ge 7 Sb 78 Te 15 recording layer to 17 nm, a (ZnS) 80 (SiO 2 ) 20 protective layer to 45 nm, and an Al 99.5 Ta 0.5 alloy reflection layer to 220 nm (volume resistivity of about 100 n ⁇ m and sheet resistivity of 0.45 ⁇ / ⁇ ) by sputtering in the vacuum chamber.
  • An ultraviolet curing resin protective coat was applied over this substrate to a thickness of 4 ⁇ m.
  • a guide groove for tracking was given groove meanders 30 nm in amplitude (peak-to-peak) which were formed by frequency-modulating a 22.05-kHz carrier wave by ⁇ 1 kHz. That is, address information was provided in the form of so-called ATIP along the spiral groove.
  • the disk was arranged so that a major axis of a focused laser beam was oriented in the direction of the disk radius, the laser beam having a wavelength of about 810 nm and an elliptical shape about 108 ⁇ m in major axis by about 1.5 ⁇ m in minor axis.
  • the disk was scanned at a linear velocity of 3-6 m/s and irradiated with a power of 400-600 mW for initialization.
  • a servo was activated to crystallize the grooves and the lands once with 9.5 mW of DC light to reduce the noise of the crystallization level.
  • the retrieving was performed at ⁇ 2-speed irrespective of the linear velocity used for recording.
  • the jitter tolerance value for the CD format in this case is 17.5 nanoseconds.
  • an arbitrary waveform signal source AWG520 of Sony Techtronix made was used as a signal source for generating gate signals.
  • the recording was made at a linear velocity 16 times the CD linear velocity (19.2 m/s) and the reference clock period T was 14.5 nanoseconds.
  • ⁇ 1 was set to ⁇ c (constant value) and then changed to examine the dependency of the amorphous mark formation on the off pulse section length.
  • FIG. 14( b ) shows the dependency of the modulation on the recording pulse section.
  • ⁇ 1 was set to ⁇ c (a constant value) and changed uniformly.
  • FIGS. 17, 18 and 19 show these values with dotted lines.
  • FIGS. 17 ( a ) and 17 ( b ) represent the ⁇ 1 -dependency of the mark length and space length and the ⁇ 1 -dependency of the mark jitter and the space jitter, respectively. It is seen from FIG. 17( b ) that ⁇ 1 is preferably set to 0.8-1.8 to keep the jitter below 17.5 nanoseconds.
  • FIGS. 19 ( a ) and 19 ( b ) show the ⁇ m -dependency of the mark length and the space length and the ⁇ m -dependency of the mark jitter and the space jitter, respectively.
  • the recording pulse section and the off pulse section are represented by the top and bottom portions of the rectangular wave. Individual lengths of sections are indicated by numbers, and the depicted lengths of the top and bottom portions in the figure are not scaled to the exact lengths of the sections.
  • the erase power Pe was set to 10 mW.
  • the divided pulses are as shown in FIG. 22.
  • the erase power Pe was also set to 10 mW as in the case with the ⁇ 16-speed.
  • the erase ratio was evaluated by changing the linear velocity while keeping the product of the linear velocity and the reference clock period constant.
  • the overwrite erase ratio of 20 dB or more was obtained for the 10, 12, 16 and 18 times the CD linear velocity.
  • the recording layer similar to that used above was peeled off after being initialized and its crystallinity was observed with a transmission electron microscope. The observation found that the recording layer was a polycrystal formed of a single phase of hexagonal crystal. The crystal phase was found to have no phase separation and is assumed to have a single phase polycrystalline structure with the orientations rotated. An examination using an X-ray diffraction found that it had a hexagonal structure.
  • a (ZnS) 80 (SiO 2 ) 20 protective layer was deposited to a thickness of 68 nm, a Ge 5 Sb 77 Te 18 recording layer to 14 nm, a (ZnS) 80 (SiO 2 ) 20 protective layer to 25 nm, and an Al 99.5 Ta 0.5 alloy reflection layer to 200 nm (volume resistivity of about 100 n ⁇ m and sheet resistivity of 0.5 ⁇ / ⁇ ) by sputtering in the vacuum chamber.
  • An ultraviolet curing resin layer was applied over this substrate to a thickness of 4 ⁇ m by a spin coat. This is bonded with another substrate 0.6 mm thick having the same structure of layers to form a phase change disk.
  • the disk thus obtained was arranged so that a major axis of a focused laser beam was oriented in the direction of the disk radius, the laser beam having a wavelength of about 810 nm and an elliptical shape about 108 ⁇ m in major axis by about 1.5 ⁇ m in minor axis.
  • the disk was scanned at a linear velocity of 3-6 m/s and irradiated with a power of 400-600 mW for initialization.
  • tracking and focus servos were activated to scan about 6 mW of DC light over the grooves once at 4 m/s to reduce the noise of the crystallization level.
  • an arbitrary waveform signal source AWG610 manufactured by Sony Techtronix was used as a signal source for generating gate signals.
  • the length of a 3T mark was 0.4 ⁇ m and the clock period at each linear velocity was so set that the recording density would be the same as that of DVD (26.16 MHz at 3.5 m/s).
  • the linear velocity during the recording was set to 16.8 m/s (clock frequency of 125.93 MHz and clock period of 7.9 nsec) equivalent to the ⁇ 4.8-speed of DVD; a 14T section was divided by using simple waveforms as shown in FIG. 25; and the intermediate divided recording pulses were examined.
  • the space was set to 14T.
  • Tw+Tb 2T was set and Pw and Pb were applied for 7T periods (FIG. 25( b )).
  • Tw/T the dependency of the modulation of the recording mark portion of the retrieved signal on a ratio of Tw to T
  • the overwrite was performed by using a repetitive pattern (8T pattern) consisting of 8T mark with divided recording pulses and 8T spaces, and a repetitive pattern (3T pattern) consisting of 3T mark with divided recording pulses and 3T spaces.
  • 8T pattern consisting of 8T mark with divided recording pulses and 8T spaces
  • 3T pattern consisting of 3T mark with divided recording pulses and 3T spaces.
  • the overwrite erase ratio was determined by keeping the product of the linear velocity and the reference clock period constant so that the same recording density as the DVD was obtained.
  • the overwrite erase ratio of 25 dB or more was obtained for 14 m/s and 17.5 m/s.
  • a pulse dividing method based on the divided recording pulse generating method 3 described above and using a base period of 2T was performed on a EFM+ modulation signal consisting of 3T-11T and 14T marks.
  • This EFM+ modulation signal was recorded at 14 m/s and 16.8 m/s (3 and 4.8 times the DVD linear velocity of 3.5 m/s).
  • the clock frequency was 104.9 MHz and the clock period was 9.5 nsec.
  • the clock frequency was 125.9 MHz and the clock period was 7.9 nsec.
  • the specific pulse dividing method is as shown in FIG. 26.
  • the recording power Pw 1 was also set to a fixed value irrespective of the i value.
  • R top was about 18%. Measurement of the overwrite dependency at the recording power of 15.0 mW found that, as shown in FIG. 27( c ), the edge-to-clock jitter was 11% or less even after 10,000 overwrite operations. At this time R top and the modulation exhibited almost no change with the overwrite.
  • a pulse dividing method of FIG. 28 based on the divided recording pulse generating method 3 described above was performed on the similar disk by recording an EFM+ modulation signal at a linear velocity of 7 m/s, equivalent to two times the DVD linear velocity, and a clock frequency of 52.5 MHz (clock period of 19.1 nsec).
  • the recording power Pw 1 was also set constant, not dependent on the i value.
  • the edge-to-clock jitter and the recording power dependency of the modulation were measured. As shown in FIGS. 27 ( a ) and 27 ( b ), at the recording power of 13.0 mW, the edge-to-clock jitter was less than 8% and the modulation achieved 57% or higher. R top was about 18%.
  • the overwrite dependency was measured and it was found that, as shown in FIG. 27( c ), the edge-to-clock jitter was below 11% even after 10,000 overwrite operations. At this time R top and the modulation exhibited almost no change with the overwrite.
  • the use of the pulse dividing method based on the divided recording pulse generation method 3 enables recording in a linear velocity range of 2 to 4.8 times the DVD linear velocity.
  • the recording with a constant angular velocity can be performed in a radial range, for example, from about 24 mm to about 58 mm, which constitutes a data area of DVD.

Abstract

An optical recording method for recording mark length-modulated information on a recording medium by using a plurality of recording mark lengths. The optical recording method comprises the steps of:
when a time length of one recording mark is denoted nT (T is a reference clock period equal to or less than 25 ns, and n is a natural number equal to or more than 2),
(i) dividing the time length of the recording mark nT into
ηn T,α 1 T, β 1 T, α 2 T, β 2 T, . . . , α 1 T, β 1 T, . . . , α m T, β m T, η 2 T
in that order (m is a pulse division number; Σi11)+η12=n; α1 (1≦i≦m) is a real number >0; β1 (1≦i≦m−1) is a real number >0; βm is a real number ≦0; and η1 is a real number of −2≦η1≦2 and η2 is a real number of −2≦η2≦2);
radiating recording light with a recording power Pw1 in a time duration of α1T (1≦i≦m), and radiating recording light with a bias power Pb1 in a time duration of βiT (1≦i≦m), the bias power being Pb1<Pw1 and Pb1<Pw1+1; and
(ii) changing m, α1, β1, η1, η2, Pw1 and Pb1 according to n of the time length nT of the recording mark;
wherein the pulse division number m is 2 or more for the time duration of at least one recording mark and meets n/m≧1.25 for the time length of all the recording marks.

Description

  • (This is a continuation application of International patent application No.PCT/JP00/03036) [0001]
  • TECHNICAL FIELD
  • The present invention relates to an optical recording method and an optical recording medium. [0002]
  • BACKGROUND ART
  • As the amount of information increases in recent years, there are growing demands for a recording medium capable of writing and retrieving a large amount of data at high speed and in high density. There are growing expectations that the optical disks will meet this demand. [0003]
  • There are two types of optical disks: a write-once type that allows the user to record data only once, and a rewritable type that allows the user to record and erase data as many times as they wish. Examples of the rewritable optical disk include a magnetooptical recording medium that utilizes a magneto-optical effect and a phase-change type recording medium that utilizes a change in reflectance accompanying a reversible crystal state change. [0004]
  • The principle of recording an optical disk involves applying a recording power to a recording layer to raise the temperature of that layer to or above a predetermined critical temperature to cause a physical or chemical change for data recording. This principle applies to all of the following media: a write-once medium utilizing pitting or deformation, an magnetooptical medium utilizing a magnetic reversal at the vicinity of the Curie point, and a phase change medium utilizing a phase transition between amorphous and crystal states of the recording layer. [0005]
  • Further, taking advantage of the 1-beam-overwrite ability (erasing and writing at the same time) of the phase change recording medium, rewritable compact disks compatible with CDs and DVDs (CD-ReWritable and CD-RW) and rewritable DVDs have been developed. [0006]
  • Almost all of these optical recording media in recent years employ a mark length recording method, which is suited for increasing the recording density. [0007]
  • The mark length recording is a method that records data by changing both the lengths of marks and the lengths of spaces. Compared with a mark position recording method which changes only the lengths of the spaces, this method is more suited to increasing the recording density and can increase the recording density by as much as 1.5 times. However, to retrieve data accurately makes the detection of the time length of the mark stringent, thus requiring precise control of the shape of mark edges. Further, there is another difficulty that a plurality of kinds of marks with different lengths, from short marks to long marks, need to be formed. [0008]
  • In the following descriptions, the spatial length of a mark is referred to as a mark length and a time length of the mark as a mark time length. When a reference clock period is determined, the mark length and the mark time length have a one-to-one correspondence. [0009]
  • In the mark length recording, when writing an nT mark (a mark having a mark time length of nT where T is a reference clock period of data and n is a natural number), simply radiating a recording power of square wave with the time length of nT or with the length finely adjusted will result in the front and rear ends of each mark differing in temperature distribution, which in turn causes the rear end portion in particular to accumulate heat and widen, forming an mark with an asymmetric geometry. This raises difficulties in precisely controlling the mark length and suppressing variations of the mark edge. [0010]
  • To uniformly shape the marks, from short marks to long marks, various means have been employed, such as division of recording pulses and use of off pulses. For example, the following techniques have been adopted in the phase change media. [0011]
  • That is, a recording pulse is divided to adjust the geometry of an amorphous mark (JP-A 62-259229, JP-A 63-266632). This approach is also utilized in the write-once medium that is not overwritten. Further, an off pulse is widely employed as a mark shape compensation means (JP-A 63-22439, etc.) [0012]
  • Other proposed methods include one which deliberately dull a trailing edge of the recording pulse to adjust the mark length and the mark time length (JP-A 7-37252); one which shifts a recording pulse radiation time (JP-A 8-287465); one which, in a multipulse recording method, differentiates a value of bias power during the mark writing operation from that during the space writing operation or erasing operation (JP-A 7-37251); and one which controls a cooling time according to a linear velocity (JP-A 9-7176). [0013]
  • The recording method based on the above pulse division approach is also used in the magnetooptical recording medium and the write-once type optical recording medium. In the magnetooptical and write-once type mediums, this approach aims to prevent heat from becoming localized. In the phase change medium, this approach has additional objective of preventing recrystallization. [0014]
  • Common examples of mark length modulation recording include a CD compatible medium using an EFM (Eight-Fourteen Modulation), a DVD compatible medium using an EFM+ modulation, a variation of 8-16 modulation, and a magnetooptical recording medium using a (1, 7)-RLL-NRZI (Ruu-Length Limited Non-Return to Zero Inverted) modulation. The EFM modulation provides 3T to 11T marks; the EFM+ modulation provides 3T to 14T marks; and the (1, 7)-RLL-NRZI modulation provides 2T to 8T marks. Of these, the EFM+ modulation and the (1, 7)-RLL-NRZI modulation are known as modulation methods for high-density mark length modulation recording. [0015]
  • As the recording pulse division scheme for the mark length modulation recording media such as CD, the following method is widely used. [0016]
  • That is, when a mark to be recorded has a time length of nT (T is a reference clock period and n is a natural number equal to or greater than 2), the time (n−η)T is divided into [0017]
  • α1 T, β 1 T, α 2 T, β 2 T, . . . , α m T, β m T
  • (where Σα[0018] 1+Σβ1=n−η; η is a real number from 0 to 2; m is a number satisfying m=m−k; and k is 1 or 2). In a time duration of α1T (1≦i≦m) as the recording pulse section, recording light with a recording power Pw is radiated. In a time duration of β1T (1≦i≦m) as the off pulse section, recording light with a bias power Pb, less than Pw1 is radiated.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing a power pattern of the recording light used in this recording method. To form a mark of a length shown in FIG. 2([0019] a), a pattern shown in FIG. 2(b) is used. When forming a mark that is mark-length-modulated to the length of nT (T is a reference clock period; and n is a mark length, an integer value, that can be taken in the mark length modulation recording), (n−η)T is divided into m=n−k (k is 1 or 2) recording pulses (in the case of FIG. 2(b), k=1 and η=0.5), and the individual recording pulse widths are set to α1T (1≦i≦m), each followed by the off pulse section of β1T (1≦i≦m). In the α1T (1≦i≦m) section during the recording, the recording light with the recording power Pw is radiated and, in the β1T (1≦i≦m) section, the bias power Pb (Pb<Pw) is radiated. At this time, to ensure that an accurate nT mark can be obtained during the detection of the mark length, Σα1+Σβ1 may be set slightly smaller than n, and the following setting is made: Σα1+Σβ1=n−η (η is a real number in 0.0≦η≦2.0).
  • That is, in the conventional technique, when the recording light to be radiated to form an nT mark is divided, the recording pulse is divided into m pieces (m=n−k, where k is 1 or 2), m being obtained by uniformly subtracting k from n (as described in JP-A 9-282661), and then a predetermined number is subtracted from the number of divisions m of the recording pulse to control the mark time length accurately (in the following, such a pulse division scheme is called an “n−k division” scheme). [0020]
  • Generally, the reference clock period T decreases as the density or speed increases. For example, T decreases in the following cases. [0021]
  • (1) When the recording density is enhanced to increase the recording capacity: [0022]
  • As the mark length and the mark time length are reduced, the density increases. In this case, a clock frequency needs to be increased to reduce the reference clock period T. [0023]
  • (2) When the recording linear velocity is increased to increase a data transfer rate: [0024]
  • In the high-speed recording of recordable CDs and DVDs, the clock frequency is increased to reduce the reference clock period T. In a CD-based medium such as a rewritable compact disk, for example, the reference clock period T during a ×1-speed operation (linear velocity is 1.2-1.4 m/s) is 231 nanoseconds; but during a ×10-speed operation the reference clock period T becomes very short, 23.1 nanoseconds. In the DVD-based medium, while the reference clock frequency T during a ×1-speed operation (3.5 m/s) is 38.2 nanoseconds, it is 19.1 ns during a ×2-speed operation. [0025]
  • As can be seen from the (1) and (2), in large-capacity optical disks and CDs and DVDs with high data transfer rates, the reference clock period T is very short. As a result, the recording pulse section α[0026] 1T and the off pulse section β1T also tend to become short. Under these circumstances the following problems arise.
  • (Problem a) [0027]
  • The recording pulse section α[0028] 1T may be too short for the rising/falling edge speed of radiated light, particularly a laser, to follow. A rise time is a time taken by the projected power of radiated light such as laser to reach a set value, and a fall time is a time taken by the projected power of the radiated light such as laser to fall from the set value to a complete off level. At present the rise and fall times take at least 2-3 nanoseconds respectively. Hence, when the pulse width is less than 15 ns, for example, the time it takes for the light to actually project a required power is a few nanoseconds. Further, when the pulse width is less than five nanoseconds, the projected power begins to fall before it reaches the set value, so that the temperature of the recording layer does not rise sufficiently, failing to produce a predetermined mark size. These issues of response speed limits of a signal source and a laser beam cannot be dealt with by making improvements on the wavelength of a light source, on the method of radiating light onto substrate/film surface, or on other recording methods.
  • (Problem b) [0029]
  • When the off pulse section β[0030] 1T is narrow, the recording medium cannot take a sufficient time to cool down and the off pulse function (cooling speed control function) does not work although the off pulse section is provided, leaving heat to be accumulated in the rear end part of the mark, making it impossible to form the correct shape of the mark. This problem becomes more serious as the length of the mark increases.
  • This problem will be explained by taking a phase change medium as an example. [0031]
  • The currently available phase change medium typically takes crystal portions as an unrecorded state or erased state and amorphous portions as a recorded state. To form an amorphous mark involves radiating a laser onto a tiny area of the recording layer to melt that tiny portion and quickly cooling it to form an amorphous mark. When, for example, a long mark (a mark more than about 5T in length based on the EFM modulation recording for CD format) is formed using a rectangular waveform of recording power with no off pulse section at all, as shown in FIG. 3([0032] a), then an amorphous mark with a narrow rear end is formed as shown in FIG. 3(b) and a distorted retrieve waveform is observed as shown in FIG. 3(c). This is because, in the rear part of the long mark in particular, heat is accumulated by heat diffusion from the front part enlarging the melted area in the rear part but the cooling speed deteriorates significantly allowing the melted area to recrystallize as it solidifies. This tendency becomes conspicuous as the linear velocity for recording decreases because the cooling speed of the recording layer becomes slower as the linear velocity decreases.
  • Conversely, if the cooling speed is so high as to render recrystallization almost negligible, when a long mark is recorded, an amorphous mark with a thicker rear end is formed as shown in FIG. 3([0033] d), producing a distorted retrieve waveform as shown in FIG. 3(e). This is explained as follows. In the rear end of the long mark in particular, heat is accumulated by heat diffusion from the front part enlarging the melted area in the rear part and the shape of the melted area is transformed into the shape of an amorphous mark relatively precisely because the cooling speed is kept relatively high over the entire area.
  • When a plurality of off pulse sections are not distributed and properly used over the entire mark length, recrystallization becomes conspicuous somewhere in the mark, as shown in FIGS. [0034] 3(b) and 3(d) though in different degrees, preventing a good formation of an amorphous long mark and causing distortions in the retrieve waveform.
  • Inserting the off pulse sections makes sharp the temperature change over time of the recording layer ranging from the front end to the rear end of the long mark, preventing degradation of the mark due to recrystallization during recording. [0035]
  • However, as the reference clock frequency T becomes shorter because of increased density and speed as described above, the rapid cooling becomes difficult to achieve even with the off pulse sections provided in a conventional manner, resulting in the front half of the mark being recrystallized. [0036]
  • For example, when a mark with a time length of 4T is to be recorded on a CD-RW, a phase change type rewritable compact disk, by the conventional n−k division scheme (k=l), the following pulses are radiated during the process of forming the amorphous mark: [0037]
  • α1 T, β 1 T, α 2 T, β 2T, α3 T, β 3 T
  • Here, the starting end of the mark is melted by the application of the recording pulse α[0038] 1T and then heat produced by the application of the subsequent recording pulses α2T, α3T conducts toward the front part of the mark. FIG. 4 is a schematic temperature history of the mark starting end, with FIG. 4(a) representing a case in which the linear velocity is low and FIG. 4(b) a case in which the linear velocity is high. In either case, three temperature rising processes due to α1T, α2T, α3T and three cooling processes due to β1T, β2T, β3T are observed.
  • In the case of low linear velocity, as shown in FIG. 4([0039] a), there are sufficient cooling times at β1T, β2T, during each of which the temperature of the cooling layer can fall below the crystallization temperature. In the case of high linear velocity, however, because the reference clock period T decreases in inverse proportion to the linear velocity, the recording layer melted by the α1T is heated by the next α2T and further by α3T without cooling below the crystallization temperature range, as shown in FIG. 4(b). The time during which the recording layer stays in the crystallization temperature range is much longer for T4+T5+T6 of the high linear velocity than for T1+T2+T3 of the low linear velocity, so it is understood that the recrystallization is more likely to take place at the fast linear velocity. In an alloy with a composition close to a SbTe eutectic composition and used as a phase change recording layer, a crystal is likely to grow at the amorphous/crystal boundary and therefore recrystallization easily occurs outer area of the mark. Here, the low speed refers to less than about ×10-speed (T=less than 23.1 nanoseconds) and the high speed refers to about ×10-speed or more.
  • As described above, in the phase change medium, as the reference clock period T becomes short due to an increased density and speed, recrystallization is likely to occur with the conventional pulse division scheme, giving rise to a serious problem that a required degree of modulation fails to be generated at the central part of the long mark. [0040]
  • In the phase change medium in which an amorphous mark is recorded over a crystal area, although it is generally easy at high linear velocity to secure an enough cooling speed to form an amorphous solid, the crystallization time is difficult to secure. Hence, the phase change medium often employs a recording layer of a composition which tends to be easily crystallized, i.e., a recording layer of an easily recrystallizable composition. Therefore, it is important to increase the off pulse section to enhance the cooling effect, but during the high linear velocity the off pulse section becomes short to the contrary. [0041]
  • The similar problem is also encountered when the wavelength of a laser source is reduced or a numerical aperture is increased to reduce a beam diameter for enhancing the density of the phase change medium. For example, when a laser with a wavelength of 780 nm and a numerical aperture of NA=0.50 is changed to a laser with a wavelength of 400 nm and a numerical aperture of 0.65, the beam diameter is throttled to almost one-half. At this time, the energy distribution in the beam becomes steep so that the heated portion is easily cooled, allowing an amorphous mark to be formed easily. This however makes the recording layer more difficult to crystallize. In this case, too, it is necessary to increase the cooling effect. [0042]
  • The present invention has been accomplished to solve the aforementioned problems. It is an object of the invention to provide an optical recording method and an optical recording medium suited for the method, which can perform recording in a satisfactory manner even during a mark length recording using a short clock period suited for high density recording and high speed recording. [0043]
  • DISCLOSURE OF THE INVENTION
  • The inventors of this invention have found that the above objective can be realized by reducing the number of divisions m in the pulse division scheme from the conventional division number. [0044]
  • Viewed from one aspect the present invention provides an optical recording method for recording mark length-modulated information with a plurality of recording mark lengths by radiating light against a recording medium, the optical recording method comprising the steps of: [0045]
  • when a time length of one recording mark is denoted nT (T is a reference clock period equal to or less than 25 ns, and n is a natural number equal to or more than 2), [0046]
  • dividing the time length of the recording mark nT into [0047]
  • η1 T, α 1 T, β 1 T, α 2 T, β 2 T, . . . , α 1 T, β 1 T, . . . , α m T, β m T, η 2 T
  • in that order (m is a pulse division number; Σ[0048] 111)+η12=n; α1 (1≦i≦m) is a real number larger than 0; β1 (1≦i≦m−1) is a real number larger than 0; βm is a real number larger than or equal to 0; and η1 and η2 are real numbers between −2 and 2); and
  • radiating recording light with a recording power Pw[0049] 1 in a time duration of αiT (1≦i≦m), and radiating recording light with a bias power Pb1 in a time duration of β1T (1≦i≦m−1), the bias power being Pb1<Pw1 and Pb1<Pw1+1;
  • wherein the pulse division number m is 2 or more for the time duration of at least one recording mark and meets n/m≧1.25 for the time length of all the recording marks [0050]
  • Viewed from another aspect, the present invention provides a phase change type optical recording medium recorded by the optical recording method, the phase change type optical recording medium having a recording layer made of M[0051] zGey(SbxTe1-x)1-y-x alloy (where 0≦z≦0.1, 0<y≦0.3, 0.8≦x; and M is at least one of In, Ga, Si, Sn, Pb, Pd, Pt, Zn, Au, Ag, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Co, Mo, Mn, Bi, O, N and S).
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example recording pulse division scheme and an example method of generating the recording pulses according to the invention. [0052]
  • FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a conventional recording pulse division scheme. [0053]
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing a shape of a recorded mark and a change of reflectance in a phase change optical recording medium. [0054]
  • FIG. 4 is an example of temperature history when recording light is radiated against the recording layer of the phase change optical recording medium. [0055]
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of retrieved waveforms (eye-pattern) of an EFM modulation signal. [0056]
  • FIG. 6 is an example of division scheme of a recording pulse for an 11T mark according to an embodiment of the invention. [0057]
  • FIG. 7 is a graph showing a relation between α[0058] 1 and a mark time length in the embodiment 1 of the invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a graph showing a relation between β[0059] m and a mark time length in the embodiment 1 of the invention.
  • FIG. 9 is an example of division scheme of a recording pulse for an EFM random pattern in the [0060] embodiment 1 of the invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a graph showing a relation of measured values of mark time length/space time length with respect to theoretical values in the [0061] embodiment 1 of the invention.
  • FIG. 11 is an example of conventional division scheme of a recording pulse for a 11T mark/11T space. [0062]
  • FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pulse division scheme according to the invention. [0063]
  • FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a timing for generating a gate in the pulse division scheme of FIG. 12. [0064]
  • FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing a pulse division scheme in (1) of [0065] embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 15 is a graph showing a dependency of a modulation in (1) of [0066] embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a pulse division scheme in (2) of [0067] embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 17 is a graph showing a dependency of α[0068] 1 of a mark length (-▴-) and a space length (-◯-) in (2) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 18 is a graph showing a dependency of β[0069] 1 of a mark length (-▴-) and a space length (-◯-) in (2) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 19 is a graph showing a dependency of β[0070] m of a mark length (-▴-) and a space length (-◯-) in (2) of embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing a pulse division scheme in (3) of [0071] embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 21 is a graph showing a mark length (-◯-) and a space length (--), and their jitters in (3) of [0072] embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing a pulse division scheme in (4) of [0073] embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 23 is a graph showing a mark length (-◯-) and a space length (--), and their jitters in (4) of [0074] embodiment 3.
  • FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pulse division scheme according to the invention. [0075]
  • FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pulse division scheme according to [0076] embodiment 4 and a dependency on Tw/T of a modulation obtained.
  • FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pulse division scheme according to [0077] embodiment 4 of the invention.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a dependency on power of modulation and jitter and a dependency of jitter on the number of overwrites. [0078]
  • FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of a pulse division scheme according to [0079] embodiment 4.
  • PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS OF THE INVENTION
  • Now, the present invention will be described in detail by referring to the accompanying drawings. [0080]
  • The optical recording method of this invention reduces the number of divisions in the pulse division scheme, i.e., elongates each pulse of recording light to make the time during which to heat a light-irradiated portion of the optical recording medium sufficiently long with respect to the response speed of the laser pulse and also sets the time during which to cool the light-irradiated portion sufficiently long. This enables satisfactory mark length recording even with a clock period as low as 25 nm or less. [0081]
  • In more concrete terms, suppose the time length of a recording mark is nT (T is a reference clock period equal to or less than 25 ns; and n is a natural number equal to or more than 2). The time length nT of the recording mark is divided in the following order: [0082]
  • η1 T, α 1 T, β 1 T, α 2 T, β 2 T, . . . , α 1 T, β 1 T, . . . , α m T, β m T, η 2 T
  • (m is a number of pulse divisions; Σ[0083] 111)+η12=n; α1 (1≦i≦m) is a real number larger than 0, β1 (1≦i≦m−1) is a real number larger than 0, and βm is a real number equal to or larger than 0; and η1 and η2 are real numbers equal to or larger than −2, preferably 0, and equal to or smaller than 2, preferably 1). In the time length of α1T (1≦i≦m), recording light with a recording power Pw1 is radiated; and in the time length of β1T (1≦i≦m), recording light with a bias power Pb1, which has the relation of Pb1<Pw1 and Pb1<Pw1+1, is radiated. As for the time length of at least one recording mark, the above pulse division number m is set to 2 or more; and as for the time length of all recording marks, n/m≧1.25.
  • That is, while the conventional n−k division scheme sets the pulse division number m equal to n−k (k is 1 or 2), this invention defines the pulse division number m from a different perspective. [0084]
  • In this invention, as to the time length of at least one recording mark the above pulse division number m is set to 2 or more. It should be noted, however, that there is no need to perform the pulse division for all nT marks (marks with a time length of nT; T is a reference clock period; and n is a natural number equal to or larger than 2). In short marks such as 2T, 3T and 4T, the problem of heat accumulation is relatively small but the response speed of the pulse being unable to follow the pulse division poses a more serious problem. It is therefore preferred that only one pulse of recording light with a recording power of Pw be radiated or that one pulse of recording light with the recording power of Pw and one pulse of recording light with a bias power of Pb be radiated. [0085]
  • In this invention, as to the time lengths of all recording marks, it is assumed that n/m≧1.25. [0086]
  • Suppose that η[0087] 1 and η2 are both 0. Then because Σ111)/m=n/m, the value of n/m corresponds to an average length of (α11) and the value of (n/m)T corresponds to an average period of the divided pulse.
  • In the conventional n−k division scheme, m=n−k and k is fixed to 1 or 2, so that n/m=n/(n−1) or n/m=n/(n−2). This value decreases as n increases. Thus, if we let the longest mark time length be n[0088] maxT, then n/m becomes minimum for nmax. That is, because the average period of the divided pulses is longest for the shortest mark and shortest for the longest mark, α1T and β1T are shortest for the longest mark.
  • For example, in the EFM modulation, n=3-11 and k=2, so (n[0089] max/m)=11/(11-2)=about 1.22
  • Similarly, in the EFM+ modulation, n=3-14 and k=2, so [0090]
  • (n[0091] max/m)=14/(14-2)=about 1.16
  • In the (1, 7)-RLL-NRZI modulation, n=2-8 and k=1, so [0092]
  • (n[0093] max/m)=8/(8-1)=about 1.14
  • As can be seen from the above, in the conventional scheme the values of n/m are approximately 1.22, 1.16 and 1.14. When the reference clock period T becomes shorter than about 25 nanoseconds, the average period of the divided pulses in the longest mark is generally less than 25 nanoseconds and the average value of the recording pulse section α[0094] 1T or the average value of the off pulse section β1T is less than 12.5 nanoseconds. This means that for at least one i, either α1T or β1T is less than 12.5 nanoseconds. Further, when the clock period T goes below approximately 20 seconds, either α1T or β1T becomes further smaller.
  • In the above explanation, if a particular α[0095] 1 or β1 becomes longer than the average, this means that other α1 or β1 becomes shorter and the fact still remains that either α1T or β1T becomes smaller.
  • To describe more accurately, in the n−k division scheme Σ(α[0096] 11) is not necessarily equal to n and may be equal to n−η (η=0 to 2). In this case, the average value of α1 and β1 becomes further smaller, making the problem more serious.
  • In the optical recording method of this invention, m is set to satisfy the condition of n/m≧1.25 as to the time length of all recording marks ranging from short to long marks. As a result, the lengths of α[0097] 1T and β1T are made sufficiently long. For example, the recording pulse section α1T and the off pulse section β1T can generally be set slightly longer than 0.5T to sufficiently heat the recording layer and at the same time limit the heat being supplied from the subsequent pulses and thereby produce a sufficient cooling effect.
  • When a mark is long in particular, the shape of a mark is easily deformed by the accumulated heat. Hence, for [0098] marks 7T or longer in time length, n/m should preferably be set to 1.5 or more. It is of course preferred that, also for short marks 6T or shorter, n/m be set to 1.5 or more, more preferably to 1.8 or more.
  • It is noted, however, that because too large a value of n/m increases the heat accumulation, normally n/m is preferably set to 4 or less, more preferably 3 or less. [0099]
  • The optical recording method of this invention produces a greater effect as the reference clock period T decreases, and it is preferred that the reference clock period be set to 20 nm or less or more preferably 15 ns or less. A very short clock period is difficult to achieve in practice and it is normally preferred that the clock period have 0.1 ns or more, or preferably 1 ns or more, or more preferably 3 ns or more. As the clock period T decreases, it is desired that the minimum value of n/m be increased. [0100]
  • The recording mark in this invention is recognized as a physical mark formed continuously in a recording medium and optically distinguishable from other portions. That is, the invention does not join, through processing by a reproducing system, 2T, 3T and 4T marks of the conventional n−k division scheme that meet the condition of n/m≧1.25 and recognize them as a single long mark. In this invention, however, the recording mark may be formed of a plurality of physical marks that are below the optical resolution power of the retrieveing light. If we let the numerical aperture of an objective for focusing the retrieveing light be NA and the wavelength of the retrieveing light be λ, when the physical marks are spaced from each other by 0.2 (λ/NA) or more, these physical marks can be optically distinguishable as separate marks. Hence, when forming a recording mark using a plurality of physical marks, they should preferably be spaced within 0.2 (λ/NA) of each other. [0101]
  • In this invention, the parameters associated with the divided pulses such as α[0102] 1, β1, η1, η2, Pw and Pb can be changed as required according to the mark length and i.
  • Further, in this invention it is preferred that the average value of the recording pulse section α[0103] 1T (1≦i≦m) and the average value of the off pulse section β1T (1≦i≦m−1) both be set to 3 nanoseconds or more, preferably 5 nanoseconds or more, or more preferably 10 nanoseconds or more in terms of securing the response capability of the radiated light. More preferably, individual α1T (1≦i≦m) and β1T (1≦i≦m−1) are set to 3 nanoseconds or more, or 5 nanoseconds or more, or more specifically 10 nanoseconds or more. The rise time and fall time of the power of the laser beam normally used during the process of recording should preferably be set 50% or less of the minimum α1T (1≦i≦m) and β1T (1≦i≦m).
  • In this invention, although it is possible to set β[0104] m not to radiate light during the last off pulse section of βmT, if the heat accumulation problem at the end of the mark is grave, βmT should preferably be provided. In that case, it is preferred that βmT be set normally to 3 nanoseconds or more, or specifically to 5 nanoseconds or more, or more preferably to 10 nanoseconds or more.
  • When the recording pulse section α[0105] 1T (1≦i≦m) is three nanoseconds or more, especially 5 nanoseconds or more, the radiation energy required for recording can be secured by increasing the recording power Pw1 although there is a problem of the rising/falling edge of the recording light.
  • On the other hand, when the off pulse section β[0106] 1T (1≦i≦m−1), too, is 3 nanoseconds or more, especially 5 nanoseconds or more, the cooling effect can be secured by reducing the bias power Pb down to nearly the retrieveing light power Pr or to 0 as long as this is not detrimental to a tracking servo or others.
  • To obtain a still greater cooling effect, it is desired that Σ[0107] 11) associated with the time length of all recording marks be set to 0.6n or less, particularly 0.5 n or less. More preferably, Σ11) is set to 0.4 n or less. That is, the sum of the recording pulse sections Σ11T) is set shorter than Σ11T) so that the off pulse section in each mark is longer. It is particularly preferred that, for all i of i=2 to m−1, α1T≦β1T, i.e., in the recording pulse train following at least a second pulse, β1T is made longer.
  • In the recording method of this invention, the values of α[0108] 1 (1≦i≦m) and β1 (1≦i≦m−1) are set appropriately according to the values of the recording pulse section α1T (1≦i≦m) and the off pulse section β1T (1≦i≦m−1) and are normally set to 0.01 or more, preferably 0.05 or more, and normally 5 or less, preferably 3 or less. Too small a value of β1 (1≦i≦m−1) may result in an insufficient cooling effect and hence it is preferably set to 0.5 or more, specifically 1 or more. On the other hand, too large a value of β1 may cause an excessive cooling and result in the recording mark being optically separated. Hence it is preferably set to 2.5 or less, specifically 2 or less. The effect of this setting is particularly large in the first off pulse section β1T that has a great effect on the shape of the front end of the mark.
  • What has been described above can also be said of the last off pulse section β[0109] mT that has a great effect on the shape of the rear end of the mark. Hence, βm is normally set to 0.1 or more, preferably 0.5 or more, more preferably 1 or more, and 2.5 or less, preferably 2 or less. The switching period of intermediate pulse sections (group) α1T (2≦i≦m−1) between the start pulse section α1T and the last pulse section αmT should preferably be set constant in terms of simplifying the circuit. In more concrete terms, (α11)T (2≦i≦m−1) or (α11−1)T (2≦i≦m−1) is preferably set to l.5T, 2T or 2.5T.
  • In this invention, the recording light power Pb[0110] 1 radiated during the off pulse section β1T (1≦i≦m−1) is set smaller than the powers Pw1 and Pw1+1 of the recording light radiated during the recording pulse sections α1T and α1+1T. To obtain a large cooling effect, it is preferred that Pb1<Pw1 be set for the time lengths of all recording marks. More preferably Pb1/Pw≦0.5 and still more preferably Pb1/Pw1≦0.2. The bias power Pb can be set equal to the power Pr of the light radiated during retrieving. This simplifies the setting of the divided pulse circuit required for the pulse division.
  • For the time length of one particular recording mark, two or more different values of Pb[0111] 1 and/or Pw1 may be used according to i. Particularly, setting the recording powers Pw1 and Pwm used in the start recording pulse section α1T and the last recording pulse section αmT to values different from the recording power Pw1 used in the intermediate recording pulse sections αiT (2≦i≦m−1) can control the shape of the front and rear ends of the mark accurately. It is preferred that the recording powers Pw1 in the intermediate recording pulse sections α1T (2≦i≦m−1) be set equal as practically as possible as this simplifies the setting of the divided pulse circuit. Similarly, it is preferred that the bias powers Pb1 in the off pulse sections β1T (1≦i≦m−1) be all set to the same value as practically as possible unless there is any justifiable reason. At least two recording marks with different n's may have different values of Pw1 and/or Pb1 for the same i.
  • In this invention, although there are no limiting specifications as to what power of light shall be radiated onto the spaces where no recording marks are formed, the light to be radiated should preferably have a power Pe, which is Pb[0112] 1≦Pe<Pw1. In the rewritable recording medium, the power Pe is an erase power used to erase the recorded marks. In this case, it is preferred that during a (n−(η12))T section, light with a power equal to or higher than the bias power Pb1 and equal to or lower than the erase power Pe be radiated. Setting the light power equal to the bias power Pb1 or the erase power Pe facilitates the setting of the divided pulse circuit. When light with the bias power Pb is radiated during an η1T section, the light with the bias power Pb is radiated prior to the start recording pulse section α1T, thus minimizing the influences of heat from the preceding recording mark.
  • The recording power Pw and bias power Pb or erase power Pe have different physical functions depending on the type of the optical recording medium used. [0113]
  • In the case of the magnetooptical medium, for example, Pw or Pe is a power necessary to raise the temperature of the recording layer at least above the vicinity of the Curie temperature to make the occurrence of the magnetization inversion easy. In the so-called optical modulation overwritable magnetooptical medium, Pw is greater than Pe and is a power to raise the temperatures of a plurality of magnetic layers with different Curie points above one of the Curie point temperatures. [0114]
  • In the case of the phase change medium, when performing the recording through crystallization, Pw is a power to raise the recording layer to a temperature higher than the crystallization temperature. Or when performing the recording through transformation into amorphous state, Pw is a power to raise the recording layer at least to a temperature higher than its melting point. When performing overwriting through amorphisation recording and crystallization erasing, Pe is a power to raise the recording layer at least above the crystallization temperature. [0115]
  • In the write-once medium that performs recording through pitting or deformation of a metallic or organic recording layer, Pw is a power necessary to raise the recording layer to a temperature that induces softening, melting, evaporation, decomposition or chemical reaction. [0116]
  • Although the values of the recording power Pw and bias power Pb differ from one kind of recording medium used to another, in the rewritable phase change medium for example the recording power Pw is normally about 1-100 mW and the bias power Pb about 0.01-10 mW. [0117]
  • Whichever medium is used, the recording power Pw is a laser beam power necessary to raise the recording layer to a temperature that induces some optical changes in the recording layer, or to hold that temperature. The bias power Pb on the other hand is a power at least lower than the recording power Pw. Normally, the bias power Pb is lower than the recording power Pw and the erase power Pe and does not induce any physical changes in the recording layer. [0118]
  • The heat accumulation problem described above is common to a wide range of optical disks that perform the mark length modulation recording, such as phase change type, magnetooptical type and write-once type optical recording media. [0119]
  • In the overwritable phase change medium among others, because the mark recording and mark erasing are performed at the same time by precisely controlling two temperature parameters, the heating speed and cooling speed of the recording layer, the function of cooling the recording layer by the off pulses bears more importance than in other write-once medium and magnetooptical medium. Hence, this invention is particularly effective for the phase change type recording medium. [0120]
  • In the recording method using the pulse division of this invention, the same pulse division number m may be used on at least two recording marks which have different n's of time lengths nT of the pulse recording marks. Normally, the same m values are used for the nT marks having adjoining time lengths, such as 3T mark and 4T mark. With m values set equal, at least one of α[0121] 1 (1≦i≦m), β1 (1≦i≦m), η1, η2, Pw1 (1≦i≦m) and Pb1 (1≦i≦m) is made to differ from others. This makes it possible to differentiate the time lengths of the marks from one another that have the same division numbers.
  • The division numbers m may be arranged irrelevant to the magnitudes of the n values but it is preferred that the division numbers m be set to monotonously increase as the mark becomes longer, i.e., the value of m increases (including the case of staying the same). [0122]
  • Examples of pulse division scheme according to this invention are shown below. [0123]
  • EXAMPLE 1 OF DIVISION SCHEME
  • For example, in the EFM modulation that forms 3T to 11T marks, m=1 for n=3 and m is increased for n≦4 (4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11). That is, the division number m is increased to [0124]
  • m=1, 2, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
  • as the n value increases to [0125]
  • n=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11.
  • The value of n/m is minimum at 1.38 when n=11 and maximum at 3when n=3. [0126]
  • EXAMPLE 2 OF DIVISION SCHEME
  • In the same EFM modulation, the division number m is increased to [0127]
  • m=1, 2, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 6, 6
  • as the n value increases to [0128]
  • n=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11.
  • The value of n/m is minimum at 1.5 when n=9 and maximum at 3 when n=3. [0129]
  • EXAMPLE 3 OF DIVISION SCHEME
  • In the same EFM modulation, the division number m is increased to [0130]
  • m=1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 5, 5, 5
  • as the n value increases to [0131]
  • n=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11.
  • The value of n/m is minimum at 1.8 when n=9 and maximum at 3 when n=3. [0132]
  • When the same pulse division number m is used on at least two recording marks with different n values, a pulse period τ[0133] 111 and a duty ratio (α1/(α21)) may be changed. Examples of this procedure are shown below.
  • EXAMPLE 4 OF DIVISION SCHEME
  • The simplest division scheme is to make an equal division such that the pulse period τ[0134] 1=nT/m when m≦2.
  • However, simply dividing nT into equal parts may result in τ[0135] 1 assuming a value totally irrelevant to the timing and length of the reference clock period T.
  • EXAMPLE 5 OF DIVISION SCHEME
  • The pulse period τ[0136] 1 is preferably synchronized to the reference clock period T or to the reference clock period T divided by an integer (preferably 1/2T, 1/4T, 1/5T, 1/10T) as this allows the rising/falling edge of the pulse to be controlled with one base clock taken as a reference. At this time, Σ11)=Σi11) does not necessarily agree with n and an excess time is produced, so that the pulse length must be corrected. It is preferred that the sum of the pulse irradiation times be set smaller than n because setting the sum greater than n makes the mark length too long.
  • Hence, sections η[0137] 1T, η2T are provided such that Σ111)+(η12)=n (η1 and η2 are each real numbers such that 0≦η1 and 0≦η2), and these sections are changed in each of two recording marks that have the same division numbers m but different lengths. During the sections η1T, η2T light with the bias power Pb may be radiated. At this time, it is preferred that 0≦(η12)≦1.
  • The above η[0138] 1 and η2 can also be used to correct the effect of heat transferred from other preceding and/or subsequent marks. In this case, the time lengths of η1T and η2T are made variable according to the mark lengths and/or space lengths of the preceding and/or subsequent marks.
  • It is possible to use only the first η[0139] 1T or last η2T of the divided pulses and set the other to 0, or to use both of them in the range of 0≦(η12)≦1. It is also possible to radiate light having other than the bias power Pb during the sections η1T, η2T to align the mark lengths or to more precisely control the influence of heat transferred from the preceding and/or subsequent marks.
  • EXAMPLE 6 OF DIVISION SCHEME
  • The divided pulse period τ[0140] 1 and the duty ratio (α1/(α11)) are made variable according to i. With this method, jitters (fluctuations) in the front and rear ends of the mark, which are important in the mark length recording, can be improved.
  • More specifically, the first recording pulse period τ[0141] 1 and/or the last recording pulse period τm are made to differ from a recording pulse period τ1 (2≦i≦m−1) of intermediate pulses.
  • At this time it is possible to slightly adjust α[0142] 1, α1, β1, τm, αm and βm of the first and/or last pulse according to the preceding and/or subsequent mark length or space length.
  • It is preferred that the first recording pulse section α[0143] 1T be set larger than any of the subsequent recording pulse sections α2T, . . . , αmT. It is also preferred that the recording power Pw1 be set higher than the recording power Pw1 in the succeeding recording pulse sections α2T, . . . , αmT. These methods are effective in improving an asymmetry value of the retrieve signal described later.
  • The heat accumulation effect is small in short marks such as those with time lengths of 3T and 4T, so that the mark tends to be formed slightly shorter than required. In such a case, the mark time length may be strictly controlled by elongating the recording pulse section α[0144] 1T to some extent or setting the recording power Pw1 in the recording pulse section α1T slightly higher than required.
  • The method of changing the first pulse or last pulse is particularly effective when overwriting an amorphous mark in the crystal area of the phase change medium. [0145]
  • Changing the first recording pulse section α[0146] 1T can control the width of an area of the recording layer in the phase change medium that first melts.
  • The last off pulse section β[0147] mT is important in preventing the recording layer of the phase change medium from getting recrystallized and is also an important pulse that determines the area in which the recording layer is made amorphous.
  • When an amorphous mark is formed, an area in the rear end part of the mark that has melted crystallizes again, making the actually formed amorphous mark smaller than the melted area. Elongating the off pulse section, i.e., extending the cooling time length, can prevent recrystallization and elongates the amorphous portion. Hence, by changing the length of the last off pulse section β[0148] mT it is possible to change the time during which the rear end portion of the mark is kept in the crystallization time and thereby change the mark length in significant degrees.
  • Conversely, by changing the intermediate parameters τ[0149] 1, α1, β1 (2≦i≦m−1) without changing τ1, α1, β1, τm, αm and βm, the degree of modulation can be controlled without affecting the mark edges.
  • Now, the method of generating divided recording pulses that realizes the above-described division scheme will be explained below. [0150]
  • The above pulse division can basically be realized by making the division scheme for each mark time length nT programmable and incorporating it into a ROM chip. However, adding a very wide range of flexibility to the same pulse generating circuit will render the circuit complex. So, the following two pulse generating methods may preferably be used. They can provide pulses capable of dealing with almost all media with ease. [0151]
  • (Divided Recording Pulse Generating Method 1) [0152]
  • For the mark length modulated [0153] data 100, which is EFM-modulated as shown in FIG. 1(a), a division scheme 101 shown in FIG. 1(b) is applied. That is, the division is made as follows:
  • m=1, 1, 2, 3, 3, 4, 5, 5, 5 for n=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11.
  • At this time, the circuits Gate[0154] 1, Gate 2, Gate3, Gate4 that generate clocks at timings shown in FIG. 1(c) are combined to realize the division scheme of FIG. 1(b).
  • In FIG. 1([0155] c), the Gate1 denoted 102 generates the first recording pulse α1T with a delay time of Td1. The Gate2 denoted 103 generates a group of second and subsequent intermediate recording pulses α1T with a delay time of Td2. The Gate3 denoted 104 generates pulses with a bias power Pb and pulses with power Pe. That is, when recording pulses are not generated by the Gate1, Gate2 and Gate4, off pulses β1T with a bias power Pb aretrieved when the level is low and pulses with a power Pe aretrieved when the level is high. The Gate3 and Td1 determine (n−(η12))T. The Gate4 denoted 105 generates a last recording pulse αmT with a delay time of Td3 after the intermediate recording pulse group α1T has been generated. In the sections in which the Gate3 is at low level, when the recording pulses are at high level, they have priority over the off pulses.
  • β[0156] 1T can be controlled independently by the delay time Td2 and α1T, and βmT can be controlled independently by Gate3 and αmT.
  • In the section where the α[0157] 1T pulse is generated by the Gate1, a recording power Pw1 is used; in the sections where the intermediate pulse group α1T is generated by the Gate2, a recording power Pw2 is used; and in the section where the αmT pulse is generated by the Gate4, a recording power Pw3 is used. This arrangement allows the recording power to be controlled independently in each of the first pulse section, the intermediate pulse section group and the last pulse section.
  • To independently control the recording pulse width and the recording power in the first and last sections, the period of the intermediate pulses is defined by γ[0158] 111-1 (2≦i≦m−1) with Td2 as a start point, and γ, is set almost constant at γ1=1 to 3. In this case, β1 is automatically determined. In FIG. 1, γi=1.5. It is noted, however, that Td2 is defined so as to make a correction of (Td2−(Td11T)) for β1 and thus β1 can be handled as an independent parameter.
  • In either case, it is assumed that the Gate timing is synchronized with the reference clock period T or with a base clock, which is the reference clock period divided by an integer, and that α[0159] 1 and β1 are defined by the duty ratio with respect to the base clock.
  • If n is smaller than a predetermined value n[0160] c, then m=1 and the intermediate pulse group are not generated by the Gate2. If n is equal to or larger than nc, a predetermined number of pulses aretrieved according to the above (division scheme example 3). In FIG. 1, nc is set to 5 and when n is equal to or smaller than 4, then m=1; and when n is 5 or more, the intermediate pulses are generated. Here, it is assumed that the intermediate pulses are generated, according to n, in numbers equal to the division number stored in the ROM memory.
  • The last pulse α[0161] mT generated by the Gate4 is generated only when n≦nc+1. This is indicated by a 9T mark in FIG. 1.
  • When n=n[0162] c, the pulse is divided into two pulses, the first pulse and one intermediate pulse. In FIG. 1 this is represented by a 5T mark.
  • When a plurality of marks with different time lengths are each divided into the same number of divisions, if a 3T mark and a 4T mark in FIG. 1 for example are both recorded by a pair of recording pulse and an off pulse, at least α[0163] 1, β1, η1 and η2 and, if further required, Pw1 and Pw3 need to be differentiated between the 3T mark and the 4T mark.
  • (Divided Recording Pulse Generating Method 2) [0164]
  • The following description concerns a divided recording pulse generating method based on a clock signal with a period of 2T which is obtained by dividing the reference clock period T. This method has more limitations than the divided recording [0165] pulse generating method 1 but has an advantage of allowing for the design of logic circuits based on more regular rules.
  • The [0166] pulse generating method 2 is characterized in that the procedure depends on whether the value that n of an nT mark can take is odd or even.
  • That is, for the recording of a mark in which n is even, i.e., the mark length is nT=2LT (L is an integer equal to 2 or more), the mark is divided into the number of sections m=L and the α[0167] 1 and β1 in the recording pulse sections α1T and the off pulse sections β1T are defined as follows.
  • α11=2+δ1
  • α11=2 (2≦i≦m−1)
  • αmm=2+δ2
  • (where δ[0168] 1 and δ2 are real numbers that satisfy −0.5≦δ1≦0.5 and −1≦δ2≦1; and when L=2, it is assumed that only α1, β1, αm and βm exist).
  • For the recording of a mark in which n is odd, i.e., the mark length is nT=(2L +1)T, on the other hand, the mark is divided into the number of sections m=L and the α[0169] 1′ and β1′ in the recording pulse sections α1′T and the off pulse sections β1′T are defined as follows.
  • α1′+β1′=2.5+δ1
  • α1′+β1′=2 (1≦i≦m−1)
  • αm′+βm′=2.5+δ2
  • (where δ[0170] 1′ and δ2′ are real numbers that satisfy −0.5≦δ1′≦0.5 and −1≦δ2′≦1; and when L=2, it is assumed that only α1′, β1′, αm′ and βm′ exist).
  • Further, in the [0171] pulse generating method 2, the following equation is satisfied.
  • α11mm+Δ=α1′+β1′+αm′+βm
  • (where Δ=0.8 to 1.2). [0172]
  • In the above [0173] pulse generating method 2, α1, β1, α1′, β1′, δ1, δ2, δ1′, and δ2′ may change according to the value of L. In the pulse generating method 2, in the process of forming recording marks with n=2L and n=(2L +1), they are both divided into the same division number L of recording pulses. That is, when n is 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, . . . , in that order, then the division number m is set to 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, . . . in that order. More specifically, in the EFM modulation signal, for n=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, the division number m is sequentially set to m=1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 5, 5 in that order. In the EFM+ signal, n=14 is added. In that case, the division number m is set to 7. In the (1, 7)-RLL-NRZI modulation there is a case of n=2, in which case the division number m is set to 1.
  • In the [0174] pulse generation method 2, two recording marks with the same division numbers m=L and different lengths have only the first pulse period (α11)T and the last pulse period (αmm)T differ from each other. That is, for (α11mm), (α1′+β1′+αm′+βm′) is increased by Δ (Δ=0.8 to 1.2). The A is normally 1 but can be changed in a range of about 0.8 to 1.2, considering the influence of heat interference from the preceding and subsequent recording marks.
  • δ[0175] 1 and δ2, and δ1′ and δ2′ are adjusted to ensure that each mark length will be precisely nT and to reduce jitters at the ends of the mark. They are normally −0.5≦δ1≦0.5, −0.5≦δ1′≦0.5, −1≦δ2≦1 and −1≦δ2′≦1. The correction amounts at the front end and rear end are preferably set equal, i.e., |δ21| and |δ2′/δ1′| are each preferably in the range of 0.8 to 1.2.
  • The two recording marks with the same division numbers are preferably formed in such a manner that their [0176] mark length difference 1T is about 0.5T at the front end side and about 0.5T at the rear end side. That is,
  • α1111′+β1
  • (where Δ[0177] 1=0.4 to 0.6)
  • In this case, the rear end side is normally [0178]
  • αmm2m′+βm
  • (where Δ[0179] 2=0.4 to 0.6 and Δ12=Δ)
  • Setting δ[0180] 1=about 0 and δ1′=about 0 is particularly preferred as this allows the use of a circuit that can generate divided pulses in synchronism with the front end of the mark. The position of the front end of the mark is determined almost by the rising edge of the recording power laser beam at α1T and its jitter is determined by the duty ratio of α1 and β1 and by the duty ratio of α1′ and β1′. Hence, in this method, setting δ1=0 and δ1′=0.5 can control the mark front end position and the jitter satisfactorily.
  • The mark rear end position depends on δ[0181] 2 (and δ2′), i.e., the value of the divided pulse period (αmm)T (and (αm′+βm′)T) at the rear end of the mark and also on the value of the duty ratio of αm and βm (and the duty ratio of αm′ and βm′) Further, the mark rear end position also depends on the position of the falling edge of the recording pulse αmT (and αm′T) at the rear end and on the cooling process of the recording layer before and after that falling edge position. In the phase change medium where amorphous marks are formed, in particular, the mark rear end position depends on the value of the off pulse section βmT (and βm′T) at the rear end that has a great effect on the cooling speed of the recording layer. Hence, the divided pulse period (αmm)T at the rear end does not need to be 0.5T or 1T, and fine adjustment can be made with a resolution power of about 0.1T, preferably 0.05T, or more preferably 0.025T.
  • In the [0182] pulse generating method 2, the duty ratio between α1 and βi, α2/(α11), can be optimized for each mark length, but for simplification of the pulse generating circuit, it is preferred that the duty ratios in the intermediate pulses situated between the first pulse and the last pulse be set to a fixed value. That is, when L≧3 in which case intermediate pulses can exist, it is preferred that, for all i ranging from 2 to (m−1) in two recording marks with the same division numbers m=L, α1 and αi′ be set to α1=αc (fixed value) and α1′=αc′ (fixed value). Further, when L is 3 or more, αc and αc′ are preferably set to a fixed value, particularly αc=αc′, not dependent on the value of L because this further simplifies the circuit.
  • For the simplified pulse generating circuit in the [0183] pulse generating method 2, it is preferred that in the recording mark with n being even, α1 and β1 assume fixed values for all L equal to 3 or more. For all L equal to 2 or more, it is preferred that α11 be set to 2 as this causes the period (α1i)T to become 2T for all i ranging from 1 to (m−1).
  • Similarly, for the simplified pulse generating circuit in the [0184] pulse generating method 2, it is preferred that in the recording mark with n being odd, α1′ and β1′ assume fixed values for all L equal to 3 or more. For all L equal to 2 or more, it is preferred that α11 be set to 2.5 as this makes it easy to synchronize with the subsequent divided pulse period 2T.
  • Further, for the simplification of the pulse generating circuit in the [0185] pulse generating method 2, αm, βm, αm′ and βm′ each preferably assume the same values for all L equal to 3 or more, specifically 2 or more. Here, if Δ2=(αm′+βm′)−(αmm)=0.5, the circuit can be further simplified.
  • When n is 2 or 3, the division number m is 1. In that case, the α[0186] 1−β1 duty ratio and δ1 (or the α1′−β1′ duty ratio and δ1′) can be adjusted to achieve a desired mark length and jitter. Here, it is desired that δ1′−δ1=1.
  • In the [0187] pulse generating method 2, as described above, it is particularly desired that δ11′=0. In that case, the pulse generating circuit should preferably be controlled to ensure that α1 (1≦i≦m) is generated in synchronism with a frequency-divided first reference clock 3 with a period 2T which is produced by frequency-dividing a first reference clock 1 with a period T; that α1′ (2≦i≦m) is generated in synchronism with a frequency-divided second reference clock 4 with a period 2T which is obtained by frequency-dividing a second reference clock 2 that has the same period T as that of the first reference clock 1 and is shifted 0.5T from the first reference clock 1; and that α1′ rises 2.5T before α2′ rises. The use of a plurality of reference clocks can simplify the pulse generating circuit.
  • There is a case in which the rising edges of α[0188] 1 and α1′ need to be delayed or advanced with respect to the rising or falling edge of a square wave modulated according to the mark length to be recorded. In such a case it is preferred that the same delay times Td1 be added in order to make the lengths of spaces constant. Td1 is a real number between −2 and 2. When the value of Td1 is negative, it indicates a advance time.
  • FIG. 12 shows an example relation between recording pulses when the pulse division scheme in the recording method of this invention is implemented by using a plurality of reference clocks described above. In FIG. 12, the delay times T[0189] d1 of α1T and α1′T with respect to the front end of the nT mark are 0; the recording power in the recording pulse section α1T (1≦i≦m) is Pw which is constant; the bias power in the off pulse section β1T (1≦i≦m) is Pb which is constant; and the power of light radiated in the spaces and in other than α1T (1≦i≦m) and β1T (1≦i≦m) is an erase power Pe which is constant. Here Pb≦Pe≦Pw.
  • In FIG. 12, [0190] reference number 200 denotes a reference clock with a period T.
  • FIG. 12([0191] a) shows a pulse waveform corresponding to a recording mark with a length of nT, with reference number 201 representing the length of a 2LT recording mark and 202 representing the length of a (2L+1)T recording mark. FIG. 12(a) illustrates a case of L=5.
  • FIG. 12([0192] b) shows a divided recording pulse waveform when n=2L (=10) and FIG. 12(c) shows a divided recording pulse waveform when n=2L+1 (=11).
  • In FIG. 12([0193] b), a frequency-divided first reference clock 205 with a period 2T is obtained by frequency-dividing a first reference clock 203 which has a zero phase delay from the reference clock 200 with a period T. Because α11=2, the rising edge of each recording pulse section α1T (1≦i≦m) is synchronized with the frequency-divided first reference clock 205 with a period 2T. In synchronism with the frequency-divided first reference clock 205, the duty ratio of α1−β1 is adjusted to produce a recording pulse waveform 207.
  • In FIG. 12([0194] c), a frequency-divided second reference clock 206 with a period 2T is obtained by frequency-dividing a second reference clock 204 with a period T which has a phase shift of 0.5T from the reference clock 200. The leading edge of each recording pulse section α1T (2≦i≦m) is synchronized with the frequency-divided second reference clock 206 with a period 2T. Because α11=2.5, only α1T rises 0.5T before the clock. In synchronism with the frequency-divided second reference clock 206, the duty ratio of α1−β1 is adjusted to produce a recording pulse waveform 208.
  • In FIG. 12, the mark lengths 2LT and (2L+1)T are depicted so that their rear ends are aligned at T[0195] 2 and T4. Hence, there are only two possible relations (b) and (c) between the reference clocks 205 and 206, both with the period of 2T. In reality, however, when the 2T-period reference clocks are used, the front end positions of these mark lengths can be 1T out of phase with each other. Further, considering the cases of n being even and n being odd, there are four possible relations as shown in FIGS. 13(a), (b), (c) and (d). It is therefore desirable to adopt the following gate generating method to deal with this situation.
  • FIG. 13 is a timing chart explaining the above gate generating method. The gate generating method of FIG. 13 involves the following steps: (1) it generates a reference time T[0196] sync corresponding to the clock mark formed at a predetermined position on the recording track; (2) it generates four reference clocks, a 2T-period reference clock la lagging the reference time Tsync as a start point by the delay time Td1, a 2T-period reference clock 2 a leading the reference clock 1 a by 0.5T, a 2T-period reference clock 1 b leading the reference clock 1 a by 1T, and a 2T-period reference clock 2 b leading the reference clock 1 a by 1.5T; (3) when recording a mark of nT=2LT, it generates gate groups G1 a, G1 b in synchronism with either the reference clock 1 a or 1 b at timings corresponding to the α1T, α1T (2≦i≦m−1) and αmT sections; and (4) when recording a mark of nT=(2L+1), it generates gate groups G2 a, G2 b in synchronism with either the reference clock 2 a or 2 b at timings corresponding to α1′T, α1′T (2≦i≦m−1) and αm′T.
  • In FIG. 13 the [0197] reference number 300 represents the reference clock with a period T (reference clock for data). To record data at a particular address on the recording medium, the recording system normally makes a phase comparison between the synchronization signal Tsync generated at clock marks arranged on the medium for each minimum unit of address (e.g., synchronization signal such as VFO formed as a pit train on the medium and arranged for each sector, and a synchronization pattern arranged for each ATIP frame (every {fraction (1/75)} second) formed as a groove meander on the medium) and the T-period reference clock generated in advance in order to establish synchronization.
  • FIG. 13 shows an example case in which the front end of the mark appears an even number of periods T after the T[0198] sync. An even-numbered length mark 301 with n being even is shown in FIG. 13(a) and an odd-numbered length mark 304 with n being odd is shown in FIG. 13(d) As an example in which the front end of the mark appears an odd number of periods T after the Tsync, an even-numbered length mark 302 with n being even (FIG. 13(b)) and an odd-numbered length mark 303 with n being odd (FIG. 13(c)) are shown.
  • In each of FIGS. [0199] 13(a) to 13(d), when reference clocks are generated by shifting them 0.5T from one another in a manner similar to that of FIG. 12, four different clock trains are produced, as indicated by 305, 306, 307 and 308. That is, with the reference clock 305 taken as a reference, the clock 307 is shifted by 0.5T, the clock 306 is shifted by 1T, and the clock 308 is shifted by 1.5T. These clocks are all formed by frequency-dividing the T-period reference clock having its origin at Tsync and then shifting their phases by 0.5T from one another In the case of FIG. 13(a), in synchronism with each of periods P1 a, P2 a, P3 a, P4 a and P5 a the gate group G1 a corresponding to the recording pulse sections α1T, α2T, α3T, α4T, α5T.
  • In the case of FIG. 13([0200] b), in synchronism with each of periods P1 b, P2 b, P3 b, P4 b and P5 b the gate group G1 b corresponding to the recording pulses α1T, α2T, α3T, α4T, α5T.
  • In the case of FIG. 13([0201] c), in synchronism with each of periods R1 a, R2 a, R3 a, R4 a and R5 a the gate group G2 a corresponding to the recording pulses α1′T, α2′T, α3′T, α4′T, α5′T.
  • In the case of FIG. 13([0202] d), in synchronism with each of periods R1 b, R2 b, R3 b, R4 b and R5 b the gate group G2 b corresponding to the recording pulses α1′T, α2′T, α3′T, α4′T, α5′T.
  • Here, the recording pulse generating gate groups G[0203] 1 a, G1 b, G2 a and G2 b are identical to the Gate1, Gate2 and Gate4 combined in FIG. 1. That is, in FIG. 1, the Gate 1 for generating the first pulse α1T, the Gate2 for generating the intermediate pulse group α1T (2≦i≦m−1), and the Gate4 for generating the last pulse αmT are produced separately and then combined to generate the gate groups G1 a and G1 b. In FIG. 1, the first pulse α1′T, the intermediate pulse group α1′T (2≦i≦m−1), and the last pulse αm′T are produced separately and then combined to generate the gate groups G2 a and G2 b.
  • Generating the first pulse independently as with the [0204] Gate 1 of FIG. 1 can deal with the situation where (α1′+β1′) is 2.5 when n is odd, by generating the gate for α1′T in synchronism with the front end of nT and generating the 2T-period intermediate pulse group α1′T with a delay of 2.5T. This is equivalent to setting the Td2 for Gate2 in FIG. 1 to 2.5T (when there is a delay Td1, another delay Td1 is made).
  • The gate groups G[0205] 1 a, G1 b, G2 a and G2 b are selected as follows. First, with Tsync taken a reference, the starting point of the T-period reference clock 300 is determined, and it is checked whether the mark length nT rises an even number of clock periods T or an odd number of clock periods T after the starting point. More specifically, a 1-bit adder is used which is reset at Tsync and adds 1 every period. If the result is 0, it is decided that the elapsed time is determined to be an even number of periods; and if the result is 1, the elapsed time is determined to be an odd number of periods. That is, if the elapsed time from the reference time Tsync to the front end of the nT mark is an even number times the period T, then the gate signal group G1 a or G2 b is selected depending on whether n is even or odd. If the elapsed time from the reference time Tsync to the front end of the nT mark is an odd number times the period T, then the gate signal group G1 b or G2 a is selected depending on whether n is even or odd. It is therefore possible to generate all the recording pulses in a series of nT marks which are generated, with T0 as a starting point, by using combinations of the four 2T-period reference clocks shifted 0.5T from one another.
  • To determine the length of the off pulse section and the erase power Pe light irradiating section requires focusing attention on the off pulse section β[0206] mT That is, it is desired to provide the rear end of the mark with not the period 2T but with a margin of about ±1T. In this case, the timing of the last off pulse βm or βm′ needs to be defined exceptionally. To this end, it is preferable to generate a gate signal corresponding to the Gate3 of FIG. 1. For example, with the front end of the nT mark taken as a reference, the gate signals are generated depending on whether n is even or odd, that is, a gate G3 of Σ(α11) is generated with a delay time of Td1 when n is even; and a gate G4 of Σ(α1′+β1′) is generated with a delay time of Td1 when n is odd, to radiate light with different powers according to the following conditions. (1) in a duration where both G3 and G4 are off, light with a power Pe is radiated; (2) in a duration where either G3 or G4 is on, light with a power Pb is radiated; (3) in a duration where both G3 and G1 a are on at the same time, light with a power Pw is radiated for a G1 a-on section; (4) in a duration where both G3 and G1 b are on at the same time, light with a power Pw is radiated for a G1 b-on section; (5) in a duration where both G4 and G2 a are on at the same time, light with a power Pw is radiated for a G2 a-on section; and (6) in a duration where both G4 and G2 b are on at the same time, light with a power Pw is radiated for a G2 b-on section.
  • The gate priority relationship described above is determined by matching the gate on/off to logical 0 and 1 levels and performing an OR operation on each gate controlling logical signal. [0207]
  • FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 represent a case where, for simplicity, the rising edge of the first recording pulse α[0208] 1T, α1′T is at the front end of the nT mark, i.e., concurrent with the front end of the nT mark being recorded. If the mark has a delay, it is preferred in terms of keeping the space length at a desired value that the rising edges of α1T and α1′T be provided with the same delay Td1.
  • (Divided Recording Pulse Generating Method [0209] 3)
  • The following description concerns another example of the divided recording pulse generating method based on a 2T-period clock signal which is obtained by dividing the reference clock period T. This method allows for the design of logic circuits based on more regular rules than those employed in the divided recording [0210] pulse generating method 1.
  • In more concrete terms, as in the [0211] pulse generating method 2, the procedure depends on whether the value the n of an nT mark can take is odd or even. In the divided recording pulse generating method 2, the correction of the mark length difference 1T between an even-numbered length mark and an odd-numbered length mark, both having the same number of divisions, is distributed and allocated to the first and last recording pulse periods. In the pulse generating method 3, however, the correction of the mark length difference 1T is done by adjusting the off pulse length βiT (2≦i≦m−1) in the intermediate divided recording pulse group.
  • That is, for the recording of a mark in which n is even, i.e., the mark length is nT=2LT (L is an integer equal to 2 or more), the mark is divided into the number of sections m=L and the α[0212] 1 and β1 in the recording pulse sections α1T and the off pulse sections β1T are defined as follows.
  • T d11=2+ε1
  • β1-11=2 (2≦i≦m)
  • For the recording of a mark in which n is odd, i.e., the mark length is nT=(2L+1)T, on the other hand, the mark is divided into the number of sections m=L and the α[0213] 1′ and β1′ in the recording pulse sections α1′T and the off pulse sections β1′T are defined as follows.
  • T d1′+α1′=2+ε1
  • β1′+α2′=2.5+ε2
  • β1-1′+α1′=2 (3≦i≦m−1)
  • βm−1′+αm′=2.5+ε3
  • (When L=2, it is assumed that β[0214] 1′+α2′=2.5+ε2′ or β1′+α2′=3+ε2′)
  • Then, β[0215] 1, α2, βm−1, αm, β1′, α2′, βm−1 and αm′ satisfy the following equation.
  • β12m−1m21′+α2′+βm−1′+αm
  • (where Δ[0216] 2=0.8 to 1.2).
  • The values of α[0217] 1, β1, α1′, β1′, Td1, Td1′, ε1, ε1′, ε2′ and ε3′ can vary according to L.
  • T[0218] d1 and Td1′ are delay or advance times from the starting end of the nT mark in the mark length-modulated original signal until the first recording pulse α1T rises. They are real numbers normally between −2 and 2. The positive values of Td1 and Td1′ signify delays. Td1 and Td1′ are preferably set almost constant regardless of the value of L.
  • α[0219] 1, β1, α1′ and β1′ are real numbers normally between 0 and 2, preferably between 0.5 and 1.5.
  • ε[0220] 1, ε1′, ε2′ and ε3′ are real numbers normally between −1 and 1, preferably between −0.5 and 0.5. These are used, as required, as correction values for realizing precise mark lengths or space lengths in the divided pulse periods (β1-11)T that form the period 2T.
  • In the [0221] pulse generating method 3, two marks corresponding to n=2LT and n=(2L+1)T, where L's are equal, are divided into the same division number L of recording pulses in the process of recording. That is, for n=2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, . . . , the number of recording pulses for the corresponding n is set to 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 5, 5 . . . . For example, in the EFM modulation signal, for n=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, the division number m is sequentially set to m=1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 5, 5 in that order. In the EFM+ signal, n=14 is added. In that case, the division number m is set to 7. In the (1, 7)-RLL-NRZI modulation, the division number m is set to 1 also in the case of n=2.
  • To record two kinds of mark lengths of n=2L and 2L+1 with the same division numbers, the period (β[0222] 12)T and the period (βm−1m)T are each increased or decreased by 0.5T to adjust their lengths. What is important in the mark length recording is the mark end position and the jitter that are determined by the waveform of the front and rear ends of the mark. The intermediate portion of the mark does not have a great effect on the jitter at the ends of the mark as long as the correct amplitude of the intermediate portion is obtained. The above adjusting method takes advantage of the fact that as long as the mark does not appear optically divided, if the recording pulse period in the intermediate portion of the mark is extended or reduced by 0.5T, the mark length only increases or decreases by the corresponding amount and does not greatly affect the jitter at the ends of the mark.
  • In the [0223] pulse generating method 3, 2T is taken as the base recording pulse period for any mark length. The duty ratio of α1−β1 can be optimized for each mark length or for each i, but it is preferred that the following restrictions be provided for the simplification of the recording pulse generating circuit.
  • As to the front end of the mark, α[0224] 1, β1, α1′ and β1′ are each preferably made constant and independent of L for the L value of 3 or more. More preferably, α1′=0.8 α1 to 1.2 α1 and β1′=β1+about 0.5. Still more preferably, β1′=β1+0.5, α11′ and β11′. The position of the front end of the mark is almost determined by the leading edge of the first recording pulse. That is, if the position of the leading edge of α1T=α1′T is set to lag the starting end of the mark length nT by a constant delay time Td1, the actual front end position of the mark is determined almost uniquely. As to the jitter at the front end of the mark, on the other hand, if β1T has more than a certain length (in practice, 0.5T) assuming that α1T is nearly equal to α1′T, the jitter can be kept within a satisfactory level irrespective of n value by setting only β1′ to approximately β1′=β1+0.5.
  • As to the rear end of the mark, α[0225] m, βm, αm′ and βm′ are each preferably made constant and independent of L for the L value of 3 or more. More preferably, βm−1′=βm−1+about 0.5, αm′=0.8 αm to 1.2 αm, and βm′=0.8 βm to 1.2 βm. Still more preferably, αm−1′=βm−1+0.5 αmm′, and βmm′.
  • When L=2, it is preferred that β[0226] 1′=β1+0.5 to 1.5, αm′=αm+0 to 1, and βm′=0.8 βm to 1.2 βm. However, in either case, it is desired that the falling edges of the αT and αm′T and the rear end of the mark length nT be synchronized, with a predetermined time difference therebetween.
  • The rear end position of the mark depends not only on the trailing edge position of the last recording pulse α[0227] mT (or αm′T) but also on the cooling process of the recording layer temperature before and after the mark rear end position. In the phase change medium that forms amorphous marks in particular, the mark rear end position depends on the cooling speed of the recording layer temperature controlled by the last off pulse section βmT (or βm′T) Hence, if αmT and αm′T are shifted a predetermined time from the rear end of the nT mark and βm′=βm, then the mark rear end position is determined almost uniquely.
  • As to the jitter at the rear end, on the other hand, if β[0228] m−1, βm−′, αm and αm′ are longer than a predetermined length, the jitter produced is small and governed mostly by βm′=βm. Optimizing the βm′=βm can produce nearly the best jitter.
  • In the [0229] pulse generating method 3, too, in the process of high density recording in particular, the values of Td1, α1, α1′, β1, β1′, αm, αm′, βm and βm′ can be finely adjusted in the range of about ±20% to correct the heat interference according to marks or spaces immediately before or after the mark being recorded. In the above explanation, the expression “about 0.5” or “about 1” means that the fine adjustment of that degree is allowed.
  • For further simplification of the pulse generating circuit, when L is 3 or more, α[0230] 1 and α1′ are made constant and independent of i for the i value of 2≦i≦m−1. That is,
  • α23= . . . =αm−1
  • α2′=α3′= . . . =αm−1
  • Here, the expression “L is 3 or more” is the condition to establish that the division number is 3 or more and there is one or more intermediate divided recording pulses excluding first and last divided pulses. [0231]
  • More preferably, when L is 3 or more, the values of α[0232] 1 and α1′ for 2≦i≦m−1 are fixed to constant values of αc and αc′ respectively, which are independent of L. Still more preferably, αc=αc′. In the mark length recording, the formation of the intermediate portion of the mark has little effect on the mark end position and the jitter as long as the appropriate signal amplitudes are produced. In most cases therefore it is possible to make a uniform setting of α11′=αc (2≦i≦m−1) as described above.
  • It is more preferred that α[0233] m and αm′ be set to the same values of α1 and α1′ for 2≦i≦m−1.
  • When L=1, i.e., the mark length nT is 2T or 3T, it is preferred that m=1. In that case, the period (α[0234] 11)T and the duty ratio of α1−β1 (or period (α1′+β1′)T and α1′−β1′ duty ratio) are adjusted to realize a desired mark length and jitter. If β1 or β1′ is constant for n≧4, it is preferred that βm or βm′ also use the same values of β1 or β1′ for n≧4.
  • These divided recording pulses, when 0≦T[0235] d1≦2 and 0≦Td1′≦2, can be formed as follows.
  • First, (1) it is assumed that an original mark length modulation signal is generated in synchronism with the first reference clock with a period T. With the starting end of the nT mark of the mark length modulation signal taken as a reference, the first recording pulse α[0236] 1T (or α1′T) is generated with a delay time of Td1 (or Td1′). Next, (2) the last recording pulse αmT (αm′T) is generated so that its falling edge aligns, after a time difference of ε3 (or ε3′), with the rear end of the nT mark. Then, (3) as to α1T and β1T (2≦i≦m−1)—the intermediate divided recording pulses that are produced when L is 3 or more—α2T falls 4T after the starting end of the nT mark and thereafter α11-1 are generated with a period of 2T. (4) When n is odd (n=2L+1), α2′T falls 4.5T after the starting end of the nT mark and thereafter α1′+β1-1′ are generated.
  • In the above example, also when ε[0237] 1, ε1′, ε2′ and α3′ are not 0, the falling edge of at least α2T or α2′T in the intermediate divided recording pulse group is produced precisely the delay time of 4T or 4.5T after the starting end of the nT mark. Therefore, at least the intermediate divided recording pulse group can be generated in synchronism with the 2T-period reference clock, which was generated by frequency-dividing the T-period reference data clock in advance.
  • FIG. 24 shows the relation between the recording pulses when the recording pulse dividing method of this invention is implemented by combining a plurality of 2T-period reference clocks. [0238]
  • In FIG. 24, for simplicity, the recording power Pw of light radiated during the recording pulse sections, the bias power Pb of light radiated during the off pulse sections, and the erase power Pe of light radiated during other than these sections are each shown to be constant for any i. Although these powers are shown to have the relationship of Pb<Pe<Pw[0239] 1 these powers may be set to different values depending on the values of n and i. Particularly, the recording power Pw1 in α1T and α1′T and the recording power Pwm in αmT and αm′T may be set different from the recording power Pw1 in other sections α1T (i=2 to m−1).
  • Further, in FIG. 24, for simplification, it is assumed that ε[0240] 11′=ε2′=ε3′=0, and the first recording pulses α1T and α1′T are shown to fall 2T after the front end of the nT mark being recorded and the falling edges of αmT and αm′T are shown to coincide with the rear end of the nT mark.
  • In FIG. 24, [0241] reference number 220 represents a T-period reference clock.
  • FIG. 24([0242] a) shows square waves associated with the nT mark of the original mark length modulation signal, with 221 representing a mark 2LT in length and 222 representing a mark (2L +1)T in length. Here, although two kinds of marks corresponding to L=5 are shown, it is possible to handle other cases of the L value by adding or subtracting the period of 2T for the intermediate i of 2≦i≦m−1 each time L increments or decrements by 1.
  • FIG. 24([0243] b) represents a waveform of divided recording pulses when n=2L=10 and FIG. 24(c) represents a waveform of divided recording pulses when n=2L+1=11.
  • In FIG. 24([0244] b), the 2T-period reference clock 225 is obtained by frequency-dividing a T-period reference clock 223 which has no phase delay with respect to the T-period reference clock 220. When Td11=2, the falling edge of each recording pulse α1T (1≦i≦m) is synchronized with the 2T-period reference clock 225. In synchronism with the 2T-period reference clock 225, the duty ratio of α1−β1 is adjusted to produce a recording pulse waveform 227.
  • In FIG. 24([0245] c), a 2T-period reference clock 226 is obtained by frequency-dividing a T-period reference clock 224 which is 0.5T out of phase with the T-period reference clock 220. The falling edge of each recording pulse α1′T (2≦i≦m) is synchronized with the 2T-period reference clock 226. In synchronism with the reference clock 226, the duty ratio of β1-1−α1 is adjusted to produce a recording pulse waveform 228.
  • In this way, by using the T-period first reference clock [0246] 1 (223) and the T-period second reference clock 2 (224) 0.5 T out of phase with the T-period first reference clock, α1 (1≦i≦m) is generated in synchronism with the 2T-period reference clock 3 (225) which is obtained by frequency-dividing the reference clock 1 and α1′ (2≦i≦m−1) is generated in synchronism with the 2T-period reference clock 4 (226) which is obtained by frequency-dividing the reference clock 2, thereby producing the divided recording pulses corresponding to 2L and 2L+1 easily.
  • In FIG. 24, the mark lengths 2LT and (2L+1)T are depicted to have their rear ends align with each other at T[0247] 2 and T4. So, there are only two possible relations (b) and (c) between the 2T- period reference clocks 225 and 226. In reality, however, when the 2T-period reference clocks are used, the front end positions of these mark lengths can be 1T out of phase with each other although they are in phase with the 2T period. Hence, the divided recording pulse generating method 3 needs also to consider, as in the divided recording pulse generating method 2, the fact that there are four possible relations considering the cases of n being even and n being odd as shown in FIGS. 13(a), (b), (c) and (d).
  • Then, by using the 2T-period clock train [0248] 4 of FIG. 13, in the case of (1 a), a gate group G1 a corresponding to the recording pulse sections α1T, α2T, α3T, α4T, α5T is generated in synchronism with each of the periods P1 a, P2 a, P3 a, P4 a, P5 a; in the case of (1 b), a gate group G1 b corresponding to the recording pulses α1T, α2T, α3T, α4T, α5T is generated in synchronism with each of the periods P1 b, P2 b, P3 b, P4 b, P5 b; in the case of (2 a), a gate group G2 a corresponding to the recording pulses α1′T, α2′T, α3′T, α4′T, α5′T is generated in synchronism with each of the periods R1 a, R2 a, R3 a, R4 a, R5 a; and in the case of (2 b), a gate group G2 b corresponding to the recording pulses α1′T, α2′T, α3′T, α4′T, α5′T is generated in synchronism with each of the periods Q1 b, Q2 b, Q3 b, Q4 b, Q5 b.
  • These recording pulse generating gate groups G[0249] 1 a, G1 b, G2 a, G2 b are identical to the combinations of Gate 1, 2, and 4 in FIG. 1, as in the case of the divided recording pulse generating method 2.
  • That is, in generating G[0250] 1 a and G1 b, as shown in FIG. 1, the Gate1 for generating the first pulse α1T, the Gate2 for generating the intermediate pulse group α1T (2≦i≦m−1), and the Gate4 for generating the last pulse αmT are separately generated and then combined. Or in generating G2 a and G2 b, as shown in FIG. 1, the first pulse α1′T, the intermediate pulse group α1′T (2≦i≦m−1), and the last pulse αm′T are separately produced and then combined. When ε1, ε1′, ε2′ and ε3′ are not 0, the first recording pulses α1T, α1′T may be given a predetermined time difference of period P1 a, Q1 a, P1 b or Q1 b, and the last recording pulses αmT, αm′T are given a predetermined time difference of either period P5 a, P5 b, Q5 a or Q5 b.
  • On the other hand, to determine the off pulse sections and the Pe power irradiation sections, one must consider the fact that the last off pulse section α[0251] mT of the mark is irregular. That is, the period of the rear end of the mark is not necessarily 2T and must be given a margin of about 2T±1T. This can be dealt with by defining the last off pulse βm or βm′ exceptionally. For that purpose, the gate signal corresponding to the Gate3 of FIG. 1 is generated.
  • That is, when n is even, a gate G[0252] 3 of Σ(α1+β)T is generated with a delay time Td1 from the front end of the nT mark; and when n is odd, a gate G4 of Σ(α1′+β1′)T is generated with a delay time Td1′ from the front end of the nT mark. Then, when either G3 or G4 is off, the light with the erase power Pe is radiated; when either G3 or G4 is on, the light with the bias power Pb is radiated; when both G3 and G1 a are on simultaneously, the light with the recording power Pw is radiated in response to the G1 a-on section; when both G3 and G1 b are on simultaneously, the light with the recording power Pw is radiated in response to the G1 b-on section; when both G4 and G2 a are on simultaneously, the light with the recording power Pw is radiated in response to the G2 a-on section; and when both G4 and G2 b are on simultaneously, the light with the recording power Pw is radiated in response to the G2 b-on section. The gate priority relationship described above is determined by matching the gate on/off to logical 0 and 1 levels and performing an OR operation on each gate controlling logical signal.
  • In summary, all the gates for generating the recording pulse sections α[0253] 1T can be produced by the following procedure. (1) A reference time Tsync corresponding to the clock mark formed at a predetermined position on the recording track is generated; (2) four reference clocks are generated: a 2T-period reference clock 1 a produced at the reference time Tsync as a starting point, a 2T-period reference clock 2 a produced 0.5T in advance of the reference clock 1 a, 2T-period reference clock 1 b produced 1T in advance of the reference clock 1 a, and a 2T-period reference clock 2 b produced 1.5T in advance of the reference clock 1 a; (3) in recording a mark of nT=2LT, the gate groups G1 a and G1 b which have timings corresponding to the α1T, α1T (2≦i≦m−1) and αmT sections are generated in synchronism with either the reference clock 1 a or 1 b; (4) in recording a mark of nT=(2L+1)T, the gate groups G2 a and G2 b which have timings corresponding to the α1′T, α1′T (2≦i≦m−1) and αm′T are generated in synchronism with either the reference clock 2 a or 2 b.
  • The gate groups G[0254] 1 a, G1 b, G2 a, G2 b can be selected as follows. First, it is checked whether the mark length nT rises an even number of clock periods T or an odd number of clock periods T after the reference time Tsync as a start point. More specifically, a 1-bit adder is used which is reset at Tsync and adds 1 every period. If the result is 0, it is decided that the elapsed time is determined to be an even number of periods; and if the result is 1, the elapsed time is determined to be an odd number of periods. That is, if the elapsed time from the reference time Tsync to the front end of the nT mark is an even number times the period T, then the gate signal group G1 a or G2 b is selected depending on whether n is even or odd. If the elapsed time from the reference time Tsync to the front end of the nT mark is an odd number times the period T, then the gate signal group G1 b or G2 a is selected depending on whether n is even or odd. It is therefore possible to generate all the recording pulses in a series of nT marks which are generated, with T0 as a starting point, by using combinations of the four 2T-period reference clocks shifted 0.5T from one another.
  • With the divided recording [0255] pulse generating methods 1, 2 and 3 described above, by holding constant the switching period of at least intermediate pulse group (α11)T or (αii-1)T (2≦i≦m−1) at 1T, 1.5T, 2T or 2.5T, and by changing the duty ratio of α1−β1 and duty ratio of α1′−β1′, it is possible to find an optimum divided recording pulse strategy easily even when mediums with different characteristics are used or when the same medium is used at different linear velocities.
  • The optical recording method of this invention is particularly effective for a phase change medium in which information is overwritten by forming an amorphous mark on a crystal-state medium, the crystal state being taken as an unrecorded or erased state. [0256]
  • The optical recording method of this invention is also effective in cases where the recording is made on the same medium at different linear velocities. Generally, a constant density recording is commonly practiced, which does not depend on the linear velocity but keeps a product of vT at a plurality of linear velocities constant, where v is a linear velocity and T is a clock period. [0257]
  • When for example the recording based on the mark length modulation scheme is to be performed on the same recording medium at a plurality of linear velocities v in such a way that v×T is constant, the [0258] pulse generation method 2, for L equal to or more than 2, keeps the periods of (α11)T and (α1′+β1′)T for 2≦i≦m−1 constant irrespective of the linear velocity, also keeps Pw1, Pb1 and Pe for each i almost constant irrespective of the linear velocity, and reduces α1 and α1′ (1≦i≦m) as the linear velocity becomes slower (JP-A 9-7176). As a result, a satisfactory overwrite is made possible in a wide range of linear velocity.
  • When the recording based on the mark length modulation scheme is to be performed on the same recording medium at a plurality of linear velocities v with v×T kept constant, the [0259] pulse generation method 3, for L equal to or more than 2, keeps the periods of (β1-11)T and (β1-1′+α1′)T for 2≦i≦m constant irrespective of the linear velocity, also keeps Pw1, Pb1 and Pe for each i almost constant irrespective of the linear velocity, and monotonously reduces α1 and α1′ as the linear velocity becomes slower (JP-A 9-7176). In this case, too, a satisfactory overwrite is made possible in a wide range of linear velocity.
  • In the above two examples, the expression “Pw[0260] 1, Pb1 and Pe are almost constant irrespective of the linear velocity” means that the minimum value is within about 20% of the maximum value, more preferably within 10%. Still more preferably, Pw1, Pb1 and Pe are virtually constant, not dependent of the linear velocity at all.
  • In the above two examples, the method of reducing α[0261] 1 and increasing β1 in (α11)T and reducing α1 and increasing βi-1 in (α1i)T as the linear velocity decreases is particularly effective in the phase change medium. This is because in the phase change medium, the cooling speed of the recording layer becomes slower as the linear velocity decreases and it is necessary to accelerate the cooling effect by increasing the ratio of the off pulse section β1. In that case, for all linear velocities v used and for all L, it is preferred that β1 and β1′ be set to 0.5<β1≦2.5 and 0.5<β1′≦2.5, more preferably 1≦β1≦2 and 1≦β1′≦2, to secure the cooling time to change the medium into the amorphous state.
  • In the above two examples, it is further preferred that, for all linear velocities, α[0262] 1T and α1′T (2≦i≦m−1) be held constant, i.e., the intermediate recording pulses have almost constant absolute lengths of time. The expression “almost constant” means that they have a variation range of about ±0.1T at each linear velocity. In that case, the reference clock T becomes large as the linear velocity decreases, so α1 and α1′ in the intermediate pulse group necessarily decrease monotonously. Although the first recording pulse sections α1T, α1′T can be made constant, they should preferably be finely adjusted at each linear velocity. The βm and βm′ are preferably fine-adjusted at each linear velocity. In that case, it is preferred that βm and βm′ be set constant or made to increase as the linear velocity decreases.
  • In the above two [0263] pulse generating methods 1, 2 and 3, when the reference clock period T is smaller than the ×1-speed of the recordable DVD (linear velocity 3.5 m/s; and reference clock period T is 38.2 nanoseconds), n−(η12) and the first and last pulses should preferably be controlled according to the preceding and/or subsequent mark lengths or space lengths.
  • Examples in which the present invention proves particularly effective are described below. [0264]
  • A first case is where the linear velocity during the recording is set as high as 10 m/s or more and the shortest mark length as small as 0.8 μm or less in order to perform high density recording. Because the shortest mark length is expressed as nT×V where V is the linear velocity, the reduced shortest mark length results in the reference clock period T being shortened. [0265]
  • It is also effective to set the wavelength of the recording light to as short as 500 nm or less, the numerical aperture of the lens for focusing the recording light to as high as 0.6 or more, the beam diameter of the recording light to a small value, and the shortest mark length to as small as 0.3 μm or less to perform high density recording. [0266]
  • Further, it is also effective to use high density recording modulation scheme, such as a 8-16 modulation scheme and a (1, 7)-RLL-NRZI modulation scheme, as the mark length modulation scheme. [0267]
  • Another case is where the mark length modulation scheme is an EFM modulation scheme and the linear velocity during recording is set to a very high speed of 10 times the CD reference linear velocity of 1.2 m/s to 1.4 m/s while keeping the recording line density constant during the recording. [0268]
  • Still another case is where the mark length modulation scheme is an EFM+ modulation scheme, the high density recording scheme, and the linear velocity during recording is set to as high as two or more times the DVD reference linear velocity of 3.49 m/s while keeping the recording line density constant during the recording. [0269]
  • Next, the quality of the mark length modulation signal will be described by referring to the drawings. [0270]
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing retrieved waveforms (eye-pattern) of the EFM modulation signal used in the CD family including Cd-RW. In the EFM modulation, the recording mark and space lengths can take a time length of between 3T and 11T and the eye-pattern virtually randomly includes retrieved waveforms of all amorphous marks from 3T to 11T. The EFM+ modulation further includes a mark length of 14T and a space length of 14T. [0271]
  • The upper end I[0272] top of the eye-pattern converted into the reflectance is an upper end value Rtop, and the amplitude of eye-pattern (in practice, amplitude of 11T mark) I11 standardized by the Itop is a modulation m11 of the recording signal expressed as follows. m 11 = I 11 I top × 100 ( % ) ( 1 )
    Figure US20010053115A1-20011220-M00001
  • m[0273] 11 is preferably set between 40% and 80% and it is particularly important to set m11 to 40% or more. It is preferred that the signal amplitude be set large, but too large a signal amplitude will result in the gain of the amplifier of the signal reproducing system becoming excessively saturated. So, the upper limit of m11, is set at around 80%. Too small a signal amplitude on the other hand will reduce the signal-noise ratio (SN ratio) and thus the lower limit is set at around 40%.
  • Further it is preferred that the asymmetry value Asym defined by the equation below be set as close to 0 as possible. [0274] Asym = ( I slice I 11 - 1 2 ) ( % ) ( 2 )
    Figure US20010053115A1-20011220-M00002
  • Further, it is desired that the jitter of each mark and space of the retrieved signal be almost 10% or less of the reference clock period T and that the mark length and space length have nearly nT×V (T is a reference clock period of data, n is an integer from 3 to 11, and v is a linear velocity during reproduction). With this arrangement, a signal reproduction using a commercially available CD-ROM drive can be performed at a low error rate. In a recordable DVD medium using the EFM+ modulation scheme, equations (1) and (2) are defined by replacing I[0275] 11 with an amplitude I14 of a 14T mark. The jitter is measured as a so-called edge-to-clock jitter, which is obtained by passing an analog retrieved signal through an equalizer to digitize it. In that case, the value of jitter is preferably 13% or less of the clock period, particularly 9% or less.
  • Next, a preferred optical recording medium for use in the above-described optical recording method will be explained. [0276]
  • Optical recording mediums recorded according to this invention include a pigment-based organic recording medium, a magnetooptical recording medium, a phase change recording medium and various other types of recording mediums. They also include a write-once and rewritable mediums. Of these mediums, the one that can produce a particularly significant effect is the phase change recording medium, particularly a rewritable phase change recording medium in which an amorphous mark is overwritten on a crystal-state medium, the crystal state being taken as an unrecorded state. [0277]
  • A particularly preferred material of the recording layer is of a type in which crystallization initiates at an interface between a crystal area and a melted area. [0278]
  • Among the preferred phase change mediums are those having a recording layer containing still more excessive Sb in the SbTe eutectic composition. A particularly preferred composition is the one which contains excessive Sb and also Ge in the base Sb[0279] 70Te30 eutectic composition. The Sb/Te ratio is particularly preferably set to 4 or more. The content of Ge is preferably 10 atomic % or less. An example of such a recording layer is a MzGey (SbxTe1-x)1-y-z alloy (where 0≦z≦0.1, 0<y≦0.3, 0.8≦x; and M is at least one of In, Ga, Si, Sn, Pb, Pd, Pt, Zn, Au, Ag, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Co, Mo, Mn, Bi, O, N and S).
  • The alloy with the above composition, as explained above, is a binary alloy containing excessive Sb at the Sb[0280] 70Te3-eutectic point and which contains Ge for for improving the time-dependent stability and jitter, and also contains at least one of the series of elements represented by M for further reduction of jitter and improvement of linear velocity dependency and optical characteristics. Alternatively, a composition with the Te amount close to zero can be regarded as an alloy that has Te or M element added in the composition near the Ge15Sb85 eutectic point.
  • In the above composition, Ge acts to enhance the time-dependent stability of the amorphous mark without degrading the high speed crystallization function offered by excess Sb. It is considered to have a capability to raise the crystallization temperature and enhance the activation energy for crystallization. That is, the above-mentioned alloy recording layer consisting mainly of GeSbTe in the base SbTe eutectic composition can increase the Sb/Te ratio while suppressing the formation of crystal nucleus by the presence of Ge and thereby increase the speed of crystal growth. Generally, the forming of crystal nucleus initiates at a lower temperature than that of the crystal growth and this is not desirable to the storage stability of the mark at around the room temperature when amorphous marks are formed. In the alloy recording layer with the above GeSbTe as a main component, because the crystal growth at near the melting point is selectively promoted, this alloy is capable of quick erasure and has an excellent stability of the amorphous mark at room temperature. In this sense, the alloy recording layer described above is particularly suited for high linear velocity recording. [0281]
  • As the element M in the above composition, In and Ga may be used. In in particular is effective in reducing jitter and enlarging the associated linear velocity margin. A more preferred composition of the recording layer of the phase change medium is A[0282] 1 aA2 bGec(SbdTe1-d)1-a-b-c alloy (where 0≦a≦0.1, 0<b≦0.1, 0.02<c≦0.3, 0.8≦d; A1 is at least one of Zn, Pd, Pt, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Co, Si, Sn, Pb, Bi, N, O and S; and A2 is In and/or Ga).
  • These compositions are preferable because, compared with the composition near the conventional GeTe—Sb[0283] 2Te3 pseudo-binary alloy, the reflectance of individual fine crystal grains has a smaller dependency on the direction of crystal plane, providing these compositions with the ability to reduce noise.
  • Further, the SbTe-based composition with the above Sb/Te ratio higher than 80/20 is excellent in that it is capable of quick erasure at high linear velocities equal to or more than 12 times the CD linear velocity (about 14 m/s) or 4 times the DVD linear velocity (about 14 m/s). [0284]
  • This composition, on the other hand, poses a particularly large problem when the reference clock period is as small as 25 ns or less. The reason is described as follows. [0285]
  • The erasure of the amorphous mark in the above composition is virtually governed only by the crystal growth from the boundary with the crystal area surrounding the amorphous mark, and the formation of a crystal nucleus inside the amorphous mark and the process of crystal growth from the crystal nucleus hardly contribute to the recrystallization process. As the linear velocity increases (e.g., to more than 10 m/s), the time that the erase power Pe is irradiated becomes short, extremely reducing the time that the layer is kept at a high temperature around the melting point necessary for the crystal growth. In the above composition, although the crystal growth from the area surrounding the amorphous mark can be promoted by increasing the Sb content, the increased content of Sb also increases the crystal growth speed during the re-solidifying of the melted area. That is, increasing the Sb content to ensure the quick erasure of the amorphous mark during the high linear velocity recording makes the formation of good amorphous marks difficult. In other words, when the speed of recrystallization from around the amorphous mark is increased above a certain level, the recrystallization from around the melted area during the re-solidifying of the melted area formed to record the amorphous mark is also accelerated. [0286]
  • In the composition described above, there is a problem that an attempt to perform erasure at high speed to effect a high linear velocity recording makes the formation of an amorphous mark difficult. In addition, at a high linear velocity the clock period is shortened, reducing the off pulse section and degrading the cooling effect, which in turn renders that problem even more conspicuous. [0287]
  • The composition problem described above is considered relatively not so large with the commonly used conventional GeTe—Sb[0288] 2Te3 pseudo-binary alloy-based composition. In the GeTe—Sb2Te3 pseudo-binary alloy-based composition, the erasure of the amorphous mark is effected mostly by the formation of crystal nuclei within the amorphous mark and not very much by the crystal growth. Further, the formation of crystal nuclei is more active than the crystal growth at low temperatures. Hence, in the GeTe—Sb2Te3 pseudo-binary alloy-based composition, the recrystallization can be achieved by generating a large number of crystal nuclei even when the crystal growth is relatively slow. Further, during the process of re-solidification at temperatures below the melting point, the crystal nuclei are not generated and the speed of crystal growth is relatively small, so that the recording layer is easily transformed into the amorphous state at a relatively small critical cooling speed.
  • The recording layer having a composition containing excess Sb in the SbTe eutectic composition, particularly a composition further including Ge, should preferably have a crystal state consisting of a virtually single phase, not accompanied by phase separation. The crystal state can be obtained by performing an initialization operation, which involves heating and crystallizing the recording layer of amorphous state produced at an initial phase of the film deposition process using sputtering. The expression “virtually single phase” means that the recording layer may be formed of a single crystal phase or a plurality of crystal phases and that when it is formed of a plurality of crystal phases, it preferably has no lattice mismatch. When it is formed of a single crystal phase, the recording layer may be multiple crystal layers of the same crystal phase but with different orientations. [0289]
  • The recording layer of such a virtually single phase can improve characteristics, such as reduced noise, an improved storage stability and a greater ease with which crystallization can be effected at high speed. This may be explained as follows. When various crystal phases, including a crystal phase of a hexagonal structure, a cubic crystal such as Sb but with a largely differing lattice constant, a face-centered cubic crystal such as found in AgSbTe2, and other crystal phases belonging to other space groups, exist in a mixed state, a grain boundary with a large lattice mismatch is formed. This is considered to cause disturbances to the peripheral geometry of the mark and also produce optical noise. In the recording layer of a single phase, however, such a grain boundary is not formed. [0290]
  • The type of crystal phase formed in the recording layer depends largely on the initialization method performed on the recording layer. That is, to produce a preferred crystal phase in this invention, the recording layer initializing method should preferably incorporate the following provisions. [0291]
  • The recording layer is normally formed by a physical vacuum deposition such as sputtering. The as-deposited state immediately after the film is formed normally is an amorphous state and thus should be crystallized to assume an unrecorded/erased state. This operation is called an initialization. The initialization operation includes, for example, an oven annealing in a solid phase in a temperature range from the crystallization temperature (normally 150-300° C.) up to the melting point, an annealing using light energy irradiation by a laser beam and light of a flash lamp, and an initialization by melting. To obtain a recording layer of a preferred crystal state, the melting initialization is preferred. In the case of annealing in the solid phase there is a time margin for establishing a thermal equilibrium and thus other crystal phases are likely to be formed. [0292]
  • In the melting crystallization, it is possible to melt the recording layer and then directly recrystallize it during the re-solidification process. Or, it is possible to change the recording layer to the amorphous state during the re-solidification process and then recrystallize it in solid phase at near the melting point. In that case, when the crystallization speed is too slow, it may bring about a time margin for the thermal equilibrium to be established thereby forming other crystal phases. Therefore it is preferred that the cooling speed be increased to some extent. [0293]
  • For example, the time during which to hold the recording layer above the melting point is preferably set normally to 2 μs or less, more preferably 1 μs or less. For the melting initialization a laser beam is preferably used. It is particularly desirable for the initialization to use a laser beam which is elliptical with its minor axis oriented almost parallel in the direction of scan (this initialization method may hereinafter be referred to as a “bulk erase”). In that case, the length of major axis is normally 10-1,000 μm and the minor axis normally 0.1-10 μm. The lengths of major axis and minor axis of the beam are defined as a half width of the light energy intensity distribution measured within the beam. The scan speed is normally about 3-10 m/s. When the scanning is performed at speeds higher than the maximum usable linear velocity at which at least the phase change medium of this invention can be overwrite-recorded, the area that was melted during the initialization scan may be transformed into the amorphous state. Further, scanning at [0294] speeds 30% or more lower than the maximum usable linear velocity generally causes a phase separation, making it difficult to produce a single phase. A scan speed 50-80% of the maximum usable linear velocity is particularly preferred. The maximum usable linear velocity itself is determined as the upper limit of a linear velocity that can assure a complete erasure when the medium is irradiated with the Pe power at that linear velocity.
  • A laser beam source may use a semiconductor laser, a gas laser and others. The power of the leaser beam is normally between approximately 100 mW and 2 W. [0295]
  • During the initialization by the bulk erase, when a disklike recording medium is used, for example, it is possible to match the direction of the minor axis of the elliptical beam almost to the circumferential direction, scan the disk in the minor axis direction by rotating the disk, and move the beam in the major axis (radial) direction for every revolution, thus initializing the whole surface. The distance moved by the beam in the radial direction for each revolution is preferably made shorter than the beam major axis to overlap the scans so that the same radius is irradiated with the laser beam a plurality of times. This arrangement allows for a reliable initialization and avoids an uneven initialized state that would be caused by the energy distribution (normally 10-20%) in the radial direction of the beam. When the distance traveled is too small, other unwanted crystal phases are likely to be formed. Hence, the distance of travel in the radial direction is normally set to ½ or more of the beam major axis. [0296]
  • The melting initialization may also be accomplished by using two laser beams, melting the recording layer with a preceding beam, and recrystallizing the recording layer with the second beam. If the distance between the two beams is long, the area melted by the preceding beam solidifies first before being recrystallized by the second beam. [0297]
  • Whether the melting/recrystallization has been performed or not can be determined by checking whether a reflectance R1 of the erased state, after the recording layer has been actually overwritten with an amorphous mark by the recording light about 1 μm across, is virtually equal to a reflectance R2 of the unrecorded state after initialization. When a signal pattern for recording amorphous marks intermittently is used, the measurement of R1 is carried out after a plurality of overwrites, normally approximately 5 to 100 overwrites, have been performed. This eliminates the influences of the reflectance of the spaces that could remain in the unrecorded state after one recording operation alone. [0298]
  • The above erased state may be obtained, rather than by modulating the focused recording laser beam according to the actual recorded pulse generation method, but by irradiating the recording power DC-wise to melt the recording layer and then resolidifying it. [0299]
  • In the case of the recording medium of this invention, the difference between R1 and R2 is preferably set as small as possible. [0300]
  • In more concrete terms, it is preferred that a value involving R1 and R2 which is defined as follows be set 10(%) or less, particularly 5(%) or less. [0301] 2 R1 - R2 R1 + R2 × 100 ( % )
    Figure US20010053115A1-20011220-M00003
  • For example, in the phase change medium with R1 of around 17%, R2 needs to be in the range of 16-18%. [0302]
  • To realize such an initialized state, it is desired that almost the same thermal history as the actual recording condition be given by the initialization. [0303]
  • The single crystal phase obtained by such an initialization method generally tends to be a hexagonal crystal when the Sb/Te ratio is larger than approximately 4.5 and a face-centered cubic crystal when the Sb/Te ratio is less than 4.5. But this does not depend only on the Sb/Te ratio. In the recording at speeds 16 times the CD linear velocity and four times the DVD linear velocity, it is preferred that the recording layer be made of a single phase of hexagonal polycrystal. [0304]
  • The phase change medium of this invention normally has formed on the substrate a lower protective layer, a phase change recording layer, an upper protective layer and a reflection layer. It is particularly preferred to form a so-called rapid cooling structure in which the recording layer is 10-30 nm thick, the upper protective layer is 15-50 nm thick and the reflection layer is 30-300 nm thick. When the recording method of this invention is to be applied to the above optical recording medium, n/m associated with the time lengths of all recording marks should preferably be set to 1.5 or more. Further, n/m is more preferably 1.8 or more. The upper limit of n/m normally is approximately 4, preferably approximately 3, but can change depending on other conditions such as the recording power Pw and the bias power Pb. Basically, n/m needs only to fall in a range that gives a sufficient time length for cooling. [0305]
  • When the optical recording method is to be applied to a write-once type medium, a setting should be made such that Pe=Pb=Pr (Pr is a retrieving light power). It is also possible to set Pe>Pr to provide a residual heat effect. [0306]
  • The recording method of this invention does not depend on the layer structure of the recording medium or the light radiating method, and can be applied not only to a medium which has a layer structure of substrate/protective layer/recording layer/protective layer/reflection layer and in which a retrieve/write laser beam is radiated through the substrate but also to a so-called film-side incident type medium which has a layer structure of substrate/reflection layer/protective layer/recording layer/protective layer and in which the retrieve/write laser beam is radiated from the side opposite the substrate. Further, the recording method of this invention can also be applied to a medium that combines these mediums to form multiple recording layers. [0307]
  • The reflection layer has a function of promoting heat dissipation and enhancing the cooling speed. Hence, in the recording medium of this invention, the selection of the reflection layer is important. Specifically, it is preferred in this invention that a reflection layer used have a high heat dissipating effect. [0308]
  • The thermal conductivity of the reflection layer is considered to be nearly inversely proportional to its volume resistivity and the heat dissipating effect of the reflection layer is proportional to the film thickness. So, the heat dissipating effect of the reflection layer is considered generally to be inversely proportional to the sheet resistivity. In this invention, therefore, a reflection layer with a sheet resistivity of 0.5 Ω/□ or less, particularly 0.4 Ω/□ or less, is preferably used. The volume resistivity is preferably in the range of between approximately 20 nΩ·m and 100 nΩ·m. A material with too small a volume resistivity is practically not usable. A material with too large a volume resistivity tends not only to have a poor heat dissipating effect but to degrade the recording sensitivity. [0309]
  • Possible materials for the reflection layer include aluminum, silver and alloys of these materials as main components. [0310]
  • Examples of aluminum alloy that can be used for the reflection layer are aluminum alloys having added to Al at least one of Ta, Ti, Co, Cr, Si, Sc, Hf, Pd, Pt, Mg, Zr, Mo and Mn. The contents of the additive elements are normally between 0.2 atomic % and 1 atomic %. When these contents are too small, hillock resistance tends to be insufficient; and when they are too large, the heat dissipating effect tends to deteriorate. [0311]
  • Examples of silver alloy that can be used for the reflection layer are silver alloys having added to Ag at least one of Ti, V, Ta, Nb, W, Co, Cr, Si, Ge, Sn, Sc, Hf, Pd, Rh, Au, Pt, Mg, Zr, Mo and Mn. The additive elements are preferably at least one of Ti, Mg, Pd and Cu metal elements in terms of enhancing the time-dependent stability. The contents of the additive elements are normally between 0.2 atomic % and 3 atomic %. When these contents are too small, the corrosion resistance tends to deteriorate; and when they are too large, the heat dissipating effect tends to deteriorate. [0312]
  • The volume resistivity increases in proportion to the contents of the added elements in the Al alloy and to the contents of the added elements in the Ag alloy. [0313]
  • The reflection layer is normally formed by sputtering and vacuum deposition methods. Because the total amount of impurities in the reflection layer, including water and oxygen trapped therein during the film making, should preferably be 2 atomic % or less, it is desired that the vacuum level in the process chamber used for forming the layer be set to 1×10[0314] −3 Pa or less. To reduce the amount of impurities trapped, the deposition rate is preferably set to 1 nm/sec or higher, particularly 10 nm/sec or higher. The amount of impurities trapped also depends on the method of manufacture of an alloy target used in the sputtering and on the sputter gas (rare gas such as Ar, Ne and Xe).
  • To enhance the heat dissipating effect of the reflection layer, the material of the reflection layer preferably consists of only aluminum and silver, as practically as possible. [0315]
  • The reflection layer may be formed in multiple layers to increase the heat dissipating effect and the reliability of the medium. [0316]
  • For example, when the reflection layer is made mainly of silver which has a large heat dissipating effect and a protective layer containing sulfur is provided between the reflection layer and the recording layer, the influences of silver and sulfur may pose problems with the repetitive overwrite characteristic and with a corrosion resistance under an accelerated test environment at high temperature and humidity. To avoid these problems an interface layer formed of an aluminum-based alloy can be provided between these two layers so that a 2-layer reflection layer consisting of an aluminum layer and a silver layer can be obtained. In that case, the thickness of the interface layer is normally between approximately 5 nm and 100 nm, preferably between 5 nm and 50 nm. When the interface layer is too thin, the protective effects tends to be insufficient; and when it is too thick, the heat dissipating effect tends to deteriorate. [0317]
  • Forming the reflection layer in multiple layers is effective also for obtaining a desired sheet resistivity at a desired thickness of layer. [0318]
  • Now, the present invention will be explained in detail by taking example embodiments. It should be noted that the invention is not limited to these embodiments but can be applied to whatever applications are within the spirit of the invention. [0319]
  • [0320] Embodiment 1
  • Over a polycarbonate substrate 1.2 mm thick formed with a tracking groove (track pitch of 1.6 μm, groove width of about 0.53 μm, and groove depth of about 37 nm), a (ZnS)[0321] 80(SiO2)20 protective layer was deposited to a thickness of 70 nm, a Ge5Sb77Te18 recording layer to 17 nm, a (ZnS)85(SiO2)15 protective layer to 40 nm, and an Al99.5Ta0.5 alloy to 220 nm by sputtering in the vacuum chamber. An ultraviolet curing protective coat was applied over this substrate to a thickness of 4 μm and cured to manufacture a phase change type rewritable optical disk.
  • This rewritable disk was subjected to the initial crystallization process using a bulk eraser with a laser waveform of 810 nm and a beam diameter of about 108 μm×1.5 μm at a power of 420 mW. Further in an evaluation apparatus having a laser wavelength of 780 nm and a pickup numerical aperture NA of 0.55, the grooves and the lands were crystallized once with a DC light of 9.5 mW by activating a servo to reduce noise of the crystal level. [0322]
  • Then, in the evaluation apparatus with a laser wavelength of 780 nm and a pickup numerical aperture NA of 0.55, the grooves were overwritten with an EFM modulation random pattern under the conditions: linear velocity of 12 m/s (×10-speed of CD), base clock frequency of 43.1 MHz, and reference clock period T of 23.1 nanoseconds. The EFM modulation scheme uses marks having time lengths ranging from 3T to 11T. Apattern in which these marks with different mark time lengths are randomly generated is an EFM modulation random pattern. [0323]
  • These patterns were overwrite-recorded by using the above-described pulse division scheme [0324] 3 (the division number is set to m=1, 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 5, 5, 5 for n=3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11) with the recording power Pw set to 18 mW, the erase power Pe to 9 mW and the bias power Pb=retrieving power Pr to 0.8 mW. This pulse division scheme was able to be realized by slightly changing the pulse generating circuit of FIG. 1.
  • Retrieving was done at a speed of 2.4 m/s (×2-speed of CD) and the retrieve signal was passed through a 2-kHz high frequency pass filter and then DC-sliced and retrieve by taking the center of the signal amplitude as a threshold value. [0325]
  • Before performing the overwrite, the pulse division scheme was optimized in each of the mark time lengths ranging from 3T to 11T. Specifically, the first recording pulse section α[0326] 1T and the last off pulse section βmT were optimized.
  • An example case is shown in which an 11T mark (1.27 microseconds at ×2-speed) was divided into five parts and the recording pulse widths and off pulse widths were determined. [0327]
  • Using the pulse division scheme shown in FIG. 6([0328] a), the pulse widths were recorded by changing only α1. The α1-dependency of the retrieve mark time length at the linear velocity of 2.4 m/s is shown in FIG. 7. For (α1=1.0, the mark time length was 1.28 microseconds, which was most preferable. The theoretical value is 1.27 microseconds.
  • Similarly, using the pulse division scheme shown in FIG. 6([0329] b), measurements were made of the βm(m=5) dependency. FIG. 8 shows the βm-dependency of the retrieve mark time length at the linear velocity of 2.4 m/s equivalent to two times the CD linear velocity. For βm5=1.0, the mark time length was 1.35 microseconds.
  • These experiments were conducted on the marks having respective mark time lengths in order to optimize, in particular, the first recording pulse α[0330] 1 and the last off pulse β5. The pulse division scheme shown in FIG. 9 was determined. For the long marks with 8T to 11T lengths, α1=1.0 and βm=1.0 were set.
  • After the optimization, the pulse division scheme of FIG. 9 was used to overwrite the amorphous marks in the crystal area. The measurements of the mark time lengths of the retrieve signals for individual input signals of nT marks are shown in FIG. 10. The mark length change was linear and the mark length deviation of the retrieve marks was in a range that allows the 3T-11T marks to be correctly distinguished and detected. The jitter value here was low, well below the CD standard's jitter upper limit of 17.5 nanoseconds for the ×2-speed reproduction, and the modulation was 0.6 or higher. This indicates that the recording signal thus obtained was satisfactory. In the figure, the mark length refers to a mark time length and the space length refers to a space time length. [0331]
  • Next, by using the pulse division scheme of FIG. 9, the EFM random signal was overwritten. The random signal was generated using AWG520 manufactured by Sony Techtronix. At this time the pulse division was optimized for each mark length. As a result, even when the random signals were generated, desired mark lengths and satisfactory mark length jitter and space length jitter below 17.5 ns were obtained during the reproduction at ×2-speed. [0332]
  • When the random pattern was recorded, it was verified by a transmission electron microscope that the nT marks were not divided into a plurality of amorphous portions but formed into a continuous amorphous mark. [0333]
  • [0334] Embodiment 2
  • Over a polycarbonate substrate 1.2 mm thick formed with a tracking groove (track pitch of 1.6 μm, groove width of about 0.53 μm, and groove depth of about 37 nm), a (ZnS)[0335] 80(SiO2)20 protective layer was deposited to a thickness of 70 nm, a Ge7Sb79Te14 recording layer to 17 nm, a (ZnS)85(SiO2)15 protective layer to 40 nm, and an Al99.5Ta0.5 alloy to 220 nm by sputtering in the vacuum chamber. An ultraviolet curing protective coat was applied over this substrate to a thickness of 4 μm and cured to manufacture an optical disk.
  • This rewritable disk was subjected to the initial crystallization process using a bulk eraser with a laser waveform of 810 nm and a beam diameter of about 108 μm×1.5 μm at a power of 420 mW. Further in an evaluation apparatus having a laser waveform of 780 nm and a pickup numerical aperture NA of 0.55, the grooves and the lands were crystallized once with a DC light of 9.5 mW by activating a servo to reduce noise of the crystal level. [0336]
  • Then, in the evaluation apparatus with a laser waveform of 780 nm and a pickup numerical aperture NA of 0.55, the grooves were recorded with [0337] amorphous marks 11T in time length by using the pulse division scheme shown in FIG. 6(c) under the conditions: linear velocity of 19.2 m/s (×16-speed of CD), base clock frequency of 69.1 MHz, and reference clock period T of 14.5 nanoseconds.
  • The overwrite-recording was performed using the recording power Pw of 18 mW, the erase power Pe of 9 mW and the bias power Pb=retrieving power Pr of 0.8 mW. [0338]
  • The retrieving was performed at 2.4 m/s (×2-speed of CD) and the retrieved signal was passed through a 2-kHz high frequency pass filter and then DC-sliced and retrieve by taking the center of the signal amplitude as a threshold value. [0339]
  • The mark jitter was 13.1 nanoseconds and the space jitter 13.2 nanoseconds, well below the CD standard's jitter upper limit of 17.5 nanoseconds. [0340]
  • An EFM modulation random pattern was recorded and retrieved in a manner similar to the [0341] embodiment 1. The result was satisfactory.
  • EXAMPLE FOR COMPARISION 1
  • In the evaluation apparatus with a laser waveform of 780 nm and a pickup numerical aperture NA of 0.55, the disk manufactured in the [0342] embodiment 2 was recorded with amorphous marks 11T in time lengths and spaces 11T in time length alternately by using the n−k division scheme (m=n−k, n−1, the minimum of n/m is 1.1) of FIG. 11 currently employed in the CD-RW, under the conditions: linear velocity of 19.2 m/s (×16-speed of CD), base clock frequency of 69.1 MHz, and reference clock period T of 14.5 nanoseconds.
  • The overwrite-recording was performed using the recording power Pw of 18 mW, the erase power Pe of 9 mW and the bias power Pb=retrieving power Pr of 0.8 mW. [0343]
  • When the signal was retrieved at the linear velocity of 2.4 m/s, the reflectance corresponding to a central portion of the mark of the retrieved signal did not fall sufficiently. Examination of the mark found that the central portion of the mark was significantly recrystallized. The jitter exceeded the 17.5-nanosecond limit substantially and was too high to be measured. To prevent recrystallization, the recording pulse widths were narrowed while still in the n-1 division scheme but the modulation of the recording laser beam could not follow the narrowed pulses, resulting in an increased recording power Pw and showing no improvements in the cooling effect. [0344]
  • [0345] Embodiment 3
  • Over a polycarbonate substrate 1.2 mm thick formed with a tracking groove, which has a track pitch of 1.6 μm, a groove width of about 0.53 μm and a groove depth of about 37 nm, a (ZnS)[0346] 80(SiO2)20 protective layer was deposited to a thickness of 70 nm, a Ge7Sb78Te15 recording layer to 17 nm, a (ZnS)80(SiO2)20 protective layer to 45 nm, and an Al99.5Ta0.5 alloy reflection layer to 220 nm (volume resistivity of about 100 nΩ·m and sheet resistivity of 0.45 Ω/□) by sputtering in the vacuum chamber. An ultraviolet curing resin protective coat was applied over this substrate to a thickness of 4 μm. A guide groove for tracking was given groove meanders 30 nm in amplitude (peak-to-peak) which were formed by frequency-modulating a 22.05-kHz carrier wave by ±1 kHz. That is, address information was provided in the form of so-called ATIP along the spiral groove.
  • As in the [0347] embodiment 1 and 2, the disk was arranged so that a major axis of a focused laser beam was oriented in the direction of the disk radius, the laser beam having a wavelength of about 810 nm and an elliptical shape about 108 μm in major axis by about 1.5 μm in minor axis. The disk was scanned at a linear velocity of 3-6 m/s and irradiated with a power of 400-600 mW for initialization. Further, in the evaluation apparatus with a laser wavelength of 780 nm and a pickup numerical aperture NA of 0.55, a servo was activated to crystallize the grooves and the lands once with 9.5 mW of DC light to reduce the noise of the crystallization level.
  • For the retrieve/write evaluation, a Pulsetech DDU1000 (wavelength of 780 nm, NA=0.55) was used to write into and retrieve from the grooves. The retrieving was performed at ×2-speed irrespective of the linear velocity used for recording. The jitter tolerance value for the CD format in this case is 17.5 nanoseconds. As a signal source for generating gate signals, an arbitrary waveform signal source AWG520 of Sony Techtronix made was used. [0348]
  • First, the recording was made at a linear velocity 16 times the CD linear velocity (19.2 m/s) and the reference clock period T was 14.5 nanoseconds. [0349]
  • (1) First, the optimum condition for the intermediate pulse group was studied by using the divided recording pulses of FIG. 14. The recording power Pw[0350] 1 was set constant at 20 mW, the bias power Pb1 was also set constant at 0.8 mW and the erase power Pe for spaces was set to 10 mW.
  • As shown in FIG. 14([0351] a), in the divided recording pulses having constant α1=1, β1 was set to βc (constant value) and then changed to examine the dependency of the amorphous mark formation on the off pulse section length.
  • When the off pulse section was shorter than about 1T, the signal amplitude at the front end of the mark was low due to the recrystallization at the mark front end as shown in FIG. 3([0352] d). At the rear end, too, the amplitude was somewhat low. The maximum amplitude in the entire mark length divided by the erase level signal intensity (×100%) was defined as a modulation, and the dependency of the modulation on the off pulse section is shown in FIG. 15(a). It is seen that when the off pulse section was short, the modulation deteriorated due to the influence of the waveform distortion (bad formation of the amorphous mark). When the off pulse section exceeded 1T, the modulation became saturated, producing a waveform close to a rectangular wave without distortion.
  • Next, using the divided recording pulses as shown in FIG. 14([0353] b) with the off pulse section set to 1.5T, the dependency of the modulation on the recording pulse section was examined. In FIG. 14(b), α1 was set to αc (a constant value) and changed uniformly. FIG. 15(b) shows the αc-dependency of modulation. It is seen that a nearly saturated modulation was obtained for αc=1 to 1.5.
  • (2) Next, the divided recording pulses of FIG. 16 with the intermediate pulse group fixed to α[0354] 1=1 and β1=1.5 were used and the control of the mark length and the characteristic of the mark end was examined by controlling the first period and the last period. In FIG. 16, one 0.5T recording pulse section was added at the rear end of the mark to make the mark length close to 11T accurately. This made both of the mark length and the space length assume 11T and the condition for obtaining a satisfactory jitter was searched. The original waveform was a repetitive pattern of the 11T mark and the 11T space, with the first recording pulse rising in synchronism with the front end of the 11T mark. Here, because the ×2-speed retrieving was performed, the upper limit of the jitter allowable value was 17.5 nanoseconds (ns) and the 11T was equivalent to about 1.27 microseconds (μs). FIGS. 17, 18 and 19 show these values with dotted lines.
  • Using the divided recording pulses as shown in FIG. 16([0355] a), the dependency on the front recording pulse α1 length was checked. FIGS. 17(a) and 17(b) represent the α1 -dependency of the mark length and space length and the α1-dependency of the mark jitter and the space jitter, respectively. It is seen from FIG. 17(b) that α1 is preferably set to 0.8-1.8 to keep the jitter below 17.5 nanoseconds.
  • In FIG. 17([0356] b) the desired 11T was not obtained for the mark length and space length. So, α1 was set to α1=1, and the divided recording pulses as shown in FIG. 16(b) were used to examine the dependency on the first off pulse β1T length. FIGS. 18(a) and 18(b) represent the β1-dependency of the mark length and the space length and the β1-dependency of the mark jitter and the space jitter, respectively. It is seen that almost the desired mark length and space length were obtained for β1=1.3 and that satisfactory jitters were obtained for a β1 range of between 1 and 1.7. Here, β1=1.5 was chosen.
  • Further, using the divided recording pulses as shown in FIG. 16([0357] c) and setting α1=1 and β1=1.5, the dependency on the last off pulse βm length was studied. FIGS. 19(a) and 19(b) show the βm-dependency of the mark length and the space length and the βm-dependency of the mark jitter and the space jitter, respectively. The figures show that the desired mark length and space length were obtained for βm=around 0.7 and that satisfactory jitters were obtained in a wide range of βm=0 to 1.8.
  • These show that setting α[0358] 1=1, β1=1.5 and βm=0.8 results in the desired 11T mark length and minimum jitters.
  • (3) With the results of the above (1) and (2) taken into account, a pulse dividing method based on the (divided recording pulse generating method [0359] 2) described above and using a base period of 2T was performed, in a range of α1=1±0.5 and β1=1±0.5, on the EFM modulation signal which consists of 3T to 11T mark lengths. The specific pulse dividing method for each mark length is shown in FIG. 20.
  • That is, for the mark recording in which n is even, i.e., the mark length is nT=2LT, where L is an integer equal to or more than 2, the mark is divided into m=L sections and the recording pulse section α[0360] 1 where the recording power Pw1 is to be radiated and the off pulse section β1 where the bias power Pb1 is to be radiated are set as follows:
  • α11=2
  • α11=2 (2≦i≦m−1)
  • αmm=1.6
  • For the mark recording in which n is odd, i.e., the mark length is nT=(2L+1)T, the mark is divided into m=L sections and each pulse sections is set as follows: [0361]
  • α1′+β1′=2.5
  • α1′+β1′=2 (2≦i≦m−1)
  • αm′+βm′=2.1
  • Although the division number is the same m=L for the 2LT mark and the (2L+1)T mark, the first period and the last period are differentiated between these marks by giving them a 0.5T difference. [0362]
  • In FIG. 20 the delay of α[0363] 1T from the front end of the nT mark is set to Td1=0. For n≧4, the intermediate pulse group is held constant at α1=0.8 and β1=1.2 (2≦i≦m−1) irrespective of the n value.
  • Further, when n is even, the following settings are made: α[0364] 1=0.8, β1=1.2, αm=0.7 and βm=0.9. When n is odd, the following settings are made: α1′=1.0, β1′=1.5, αm′=1.0 and βm′=1.1. Only the 3T case was exceptional. A 3T mark length was obtained for α1=1.2 and β1=1.5. In FIG. 20, the recording pulse section and the off pulse section are represented by the top and bottom portions of the rectangular wave. Individual lengths of sections are indicated by numbers, and the depicted lengths of the top and bottom portions in the figure are not scaled to the exact lengths of the sections.
  • The recording power Pw[0365] 1 and the bias power Pb1 were set constant irrespective of the i value, i.e., Pw=20 mW and Pb=0.8 mW. the erase power Pe was set to 10 mW.
  • After 9 overwrites were performed (the initial recording was deemed a 0-th recording), measurements were made of the mark length and space length and also jitters for each nT mark and nT space. The measurements of mark lengths and space lengths are shown in FIG. 21([0366] a) and the measurements of jitters of the marks and spaces are shown in FIG. 21(b). The mark lengths and space lengths were almost precisely nT and the jitters were below 17.5 nanoseconds although the jitters degraded 2-3 nanoseconds from the initial recording due to overwriting. Instead of performing overwrite, the erase power Pe was radiated DC-wise for erase operation. This resulted in a jitter improvement of about 2 nanoseconds.
  • (4) An overwrite was performed on the same medium at ×10-speed of CD by changing the clock period so that the product of the linear velocity v and the clock period T was constant. That is, the reference clock period T in this case was 23.1 nanoseconds. For n≧4, α[0367] 1T (1≦i≦m) was held almost constant. That is, the intermediate recording pulse group was held constant at α1=0.5 and β1=1.5 (2≦i≦m−1).
  • The divided pulses are as shown in FIG. 22. When n was even, pulses were set to α[0368] 1=0.6, β1=1.4, αm=0.5 and βm=1.4. When n was odd, pulses were set to α1′=0.6, β1′=1.9, αm′=0.6 and βm′=1.8 Only the 3T case was exceptional. A 3T mark length was obtained for α1=0.8 and β1=2.4. This divided recording pulses correspond, except for n=3, roughly to multiplying the clock period by {fraction (16/10)} (inversely proportional to the linear velocity) while holding the recording pulse length obtained in FIG. 20 constant. The recording power Pw1 and the bias power Pb1 were held constant at Pw=20 mW and Pb=0.8 mW irrespective of the i value as in the case with the ×16-speed. The erase power Pe was also set to 10 mW as in the case with the ×16-speed.
  • After 9 overwrites were performed (the initial recording was deemed a 0-th recording), measurements were made of the mark length and space length and also jitters for each nT mark and nT space. The measurements of mark lengths and space lengths are shown in FIG. 23([0369] a) and the measurements of jitters of the marks and spaces are shown in FIG. 23(b). The mark lengths and space lengths were almost precisely nT and the jitters were below 17.5 nanoseconds although the jitters degraded 2-3 nanoseconds from the initial recording due to overwriting.
  • Instead of performing overwrite, the erase power Pe was radiated DC-wise for erase operation. This resulted in a jitter improvement of about [0370] 2 nanoseconds.
  • (5) An overwrite was performed on the same medium by using a repetitive pattern (11T pattern) consisting of 11T mark with divided recording pulses and 11T spaces, and a repetitive pattern (3T pattern) consisting of 3T mark with divided recording pulses and 3T spaces. After overwriting the 3T pattern nine times, the 11T pattern was overwritten at the 10th time and a rate of reduction in the carrier level of the 3T signal (in unit of dB) was measured as an erase ratio (overwrite erase ratio). Although the 3T pattern was slightly deviated among different linear velocities, both the 3T and 11T patterns were basically changed according to the division method of FIG. 20 so that α[0371] iT (1≦i≦m) remained almost constant.
  • The erase ratio was evaluated by changing the linear velocity while keeping the product of the linear velocity and the reference clock period constant. The overwrite erase ratio of 20 dB or more was obtained for the 10, 12, 16 and 18 times the CD linear velocity. [0372]
  • When a random pattern was recorded, it was verified with a transmission electron microscope that the nT marks were not divided into a plurality of amorphous portions but formed into a continuous amorphous mark. [0373]
  • The recording layer similar to that used above was peeled off after being initialized and its crystallinity was observed with a transmission electron microscope. The observation found that the recording layer was a polycrystal formed of a single phase of hexagonal crystal. The crystal phase was found to have no phase separation and is assumed to have a single phase polycrystalline structure with the orientations rotated. An examination using an X-ray diffraction found that it had a hexagonal structure. [0374]
  • [0375] Embodiment 4
  • Over a polycarbonate substrate 0.6 mm thick formed with a tracking groove, which has a track pitch of 0.74 μm, a groove width of about 0.27 μm and a groove depth of about 30 nm, a (ZnS)[0376] 80(SiO2)20 protective layer was deposited to a thickness of 68 nm, a Ge5Sb77Te18 recording layer to 14 nm, a (ZnS)80(SiO2)20 protective layer to 25 nm, and an Al99.5Ta0.5 alloy reflection layer to 200 nm (volume resistivity of about 100 nΩ·m and sheet resistivity of 0.5 Ω/□) by sputtering in the vacuum chamber. An ultraviolet curing resin layer was applied over this substrate to a thickness of 4 μm by a spin coat. This is bonded with another substrate 0.6 mm thick having the same structure of layers to form a phase change disk.
  • As in the [0377] embodiment 3, the disk thus obtained was arranged so that a major axis of a focused laser beam was oriented in the direction of the disk radius, the laser beam having a wavelength of about 810 nm and an elliptical shape about 108 μm in major axis by about 1.5 μm in minor axis. The disk was scanned at a linear velocity of 3-6 m/s and irradiated with a power of 400-600 mW for initialization. Further, in the evaluation apparatus with a laser wavelength of 660 nm and a pickup numerical aperture NA of 0.65, tracking and focus servos were activated to scan about 6 mW of DC light over the grooves once at 4 m/s to reduce the noise of the crystallization level.
  • For the retrieve/write evaluation, a Pulsetec DDU1000 (wavelength of about 660 nm, NA=0.55) was used to write into and retrieve from the grooves. As a signal source for generating gate signals, an arbitrary waveform signal source AWG610 manufactured by Sony Techtronix was used. In this case, the length of a 3T mark was 0.4 μm and the clock period at each linear velocity was so set that the recording density would be the same as that of DVD (26.16 MHz at 3.5 m/s). [0378]
  • First, the linear velocity during the recording was set to 16.8 m/s (clock frequency of 125.93 MHz and clock period of 7.9 nsec) equivalent to the ×4.8-speed of DVD; a 14T section was divided by using simple waveforms as shown in FIG. 25; and the intermediate divided recording pulses were examined. The space was set to 14T. The recording power was set to a constant value of Pw=15 mW, the erase power to Pe=5 mW, and the bias power to Pb=0.5 mW. The recording power application section was denoted Tw and the bias power application section Tb. Two cases were studied: in the first case Tw+Tb=1T was set and Pw and Pb were applied for 14T periods (FIG. 25([0379] a)); and in the second case Tw+Tb =2T was set and Pw and Pb were applied for 7T periods (FIG. 25(b)). In each of these two cases, the dependency of the modulation of the recording mark portion of the retrieved signal on a ratio of Tw to T (Tw/T) was evaluated. When the Tw/T for 2T periods was 1.0, the signal obtained was a square wave almost free of distortion and the modulation was maximum. When the Tw/T ratio was less than 0.5, the waveform was distorted. This is considered due to the insufficient recording power application section and therefore an insufficient temperature rise. Conversely, when the Tw/T is more than 1.0, as Tw increases, the modulation decreases. This is considered due to the insufficient cooling time, which prevents the transformation to the amorphous state by recrystallization. When Tw/T exceeds 1.5, the modulation falls below 5%, resulting in a distorted waveform (not shown). For 1T period, the modulation was low over the entire range and only the distorted waveforms were produced. This is because in the 1T period there might not be a range where the recording power application time and the cooling time were both sufficient.
  • It can be seen from the foregoing discussion that, in the divided recording [0380] pulse generating method 2 or 3, the intermediate divided recording pulse group for at least 2≦i≦m−1 is preferably set to α11′=1 and β11′=1.
  • Next, it was verified as follows that the disk discussed above was capable of high speed erasure at high linear velocities of 14 m/s and 17.5 m/s (equivalent to 4 and 5 times the DVD linear velocity of 3.5 m/s). That is, the overwrite was performed by using a repetitive pattern (8T pattern) consisting of 8T mark with divided recording pulses and 8T spaces, and a repetitive pattern (3T pattern) consisting of 3T mark with divided recording pulses and 3T spaces. After overwriting the [0381] 3T pattern 9 times, the 8T pattern was overwritten at the 10th time and a rate of reduction in the carrier level of the 3T signal was determined as an overwrite erase ratio. The overwrite erase ratio was determined by keeping the product of the linear velocity and the reference clock period constant so that the same recording density as the DVD was obtained. The overwrite erase ratio of 25 dB or more was obtained for 14 m/s and 17.5 m/s.
  • Further, a pulse dividing method based on the divided recording [0382] pulse generating method 3 described above and using a base period of 2T was performed on a EFM+ modulation signal consisting of 3T-11T and 14T marks. This EFM+ modulation signal was recorded at 14 m/s and 16.8 m/s (3 and 4.8 times the DVD linear velocity of 3.5 m/s). For the ×4-speed, the clock frequency was 104.9 MHz and the clock period was 9.5 nsec. For the ×4.8-speed, the clock frequency was 125.9 MHz and the clock period was 7.9 nsec. The specific pulse dividing method is as shown in FIG. 26.
  • For the mark recording in which n is even, i.e., the mark length is nT=2LT (L is an integer equal to or more than 2), the mark is divided into m=L sections and α[0383] 1 and β1 in the recording pulse section α1T and the off pulse section β1T are set as follows:
  • T d11=2 (T d1=0.95)
  • β1011=2 (2≦i≦m−1)
  • For the mark recording in which n is odd, i.e., the mark length is nT=(2L+1)T, the mark is divided into m=L sections and α[0384] 1 and β1 in the recording pulse section α1T and the off pulse section β1T are set as follows:
  • T d1′+α1′=2.05 (T d1′=1)
  • β1′+α2′=2.45
  • β1-1′+α1′=2 (3≦i≦m−1)
  • βm−1′+αm′=2.45
  • In this case, for L=2, β[0385] 1′+α2′=2.9 and αm=1 and αm′=αm+0.2=1.2.
  • In the case of L≧3, the intermediate recording pulse group was set to constant values: α[0386] 1′=α1=1 and β1′=β1=1 (2≦i≦m−1), and αmm′=1. For L≧2, they were set to constant values, not dependent on the n value: α11′=1.05 and βmm′=0.4.
  • Further, in the case of 3T, a 3T mark length was obtained with T[0387] d1=1.15, α1=1.2 and β1=0.8. In FIG. 26, the recording pulse section and the off pulse section are represented by the top and bottom portions of the rectangular wave. Specific lengths of sections are indicated by numbers, and the depicted lengths of the top and bottom portions in the figure do not correspond to the lengths of the sections.
  • The bias power Pb[0388] 1 was set to a fixed value Pb=0.5 mW, not dependent on the i value, and the erase power Pe was set to 4.5 mW. The recording power Pw1 was also set to a fixed value irrespective of the i value. After overwriting 9 times, the edge-to-clock jitter and the dependency of the modulation on the recording power were measured. Retrieving was performed using the reproducing light power of Pr=0.8 mW and the linear velocity of 3.5 m/s. At either recording linear velocity and with the recording power of 15.0 mW, the edge-to-clock jitter was less than 10% and the modulation achieved 60% or higher, as shown in FIG. 27(a) and 27(b). Rtop was about 18%. Measurement of the overwrite dependency at the recording power of 15.0 mW found that, as shown in FIG. 27(c), the edge-to-clock jitter was 11% or less even after 10,000 overwrite operations. At this time Rtop and the modulation exhibited almost no change with the overwrite.
  • Further, a pulse dividing method of FIG. 28 based on the divided recording [0389] pulse generating method 3 described above was performed on the similar disk by recording an EFM+ modulation signal at a linear velocity of 7 m/s, equivalent to two times the DVD linear velocity, and a clock frequency of 52.5 MHz (clock period of 19.1 nsec).
  • As in the case with 4 and 4.8 times the DVD speed, the bias power was set constant at Pb=0.5 mW and the erase power Pe at 4.5 mW. The recording power Pw[0390] 1 was also set constant, not dependent on the i value. After nine overwrite operations, the edge-to-clock jitter and the recording power dependency of the modulation were measured. As shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b), at the recording power of 13.0 mW, the edge-to-clock jitter was less than 8% and the modulation achieved 57% or higher. Rtop was about 18%. At the recording power of 13.0 mW, the overwrite dependency was measured and it was found that, as shown in FIG. 27(c), the edge-to-clock jitter was below 11% even after 10,000 overwrite operations. At this time Rtop and the modulation exhibited almost no change with the overwrite.
  • From the above discussion, it is understood that the use of the pulse dividing method based on the divided recording [0391] pulse generation method 3 enables recording in a linear velocity range of 2 to 4.8 times the DVD linear velocity. Hence, with this method the recording with a constant angular velocity can be performed in a radial range, for example, from about 24 mm to about 58 mm, which constitutes a data area of DVD.
  • Industrial Applicability [0392]
  • According to this invention, even when the reference clock period is short, a satisfactory mark length modulation recording can be performed, allowing a higher density and a faster recording of the optical recording media. This in turn leads to an increase in the recordable capacity of the optical disk and enables the recording speed and transfer rate of the optical disk to be enhanced, greatly expanding the range of its applications for recording large amounts of data such as music and video and for external storage devices of computers. For instance, it is possible to realize a rewritable CD that overwrites EFM modulation marks at speeds more than 12 times the CD linear velocity and a rewritable DVD that overwrites EFM+ modulation marks at speeds more than [0393] 4 times the DVD linear velocity.

Claims (39)

1. An optical recording method for recording mark length-modulated information with a plurality of recording mark lengths by irradiating a recording medium with a light, the optical recording method comprising the steps of:
when a time length of one recording mark is denoted nT (T is a reference clock period equal to or less than 25 ns, and n is a natural number equal to or more than 2),
dividing the time length of the recording mark nT into
η1T, α1T, β1T, α2T, β2T, . . . , α1T, β1T, . . . , αmT, βmT, η2T
in that order (m is a pulse division number; Σ111)+η12=n; α1 (1≦i≦m) is a real number larger than 0; β1 (1≦i≦m−1) is a real number larger than 0; βm is a real number larger than or equal to 0; and η1 and η2 are real numbers between −2 and 2);
radiating recording light with a recording power Pw1 in a time duration of α1T (1≦i≦m); and
radiating recording light with a bias power Pb1 in a time duration of β1T (1≦i≦m−1), the bias power being Pb1<Pw1 and Pb1<Pw1+1;
wherein the pulse division number m is 2 or more for the time duration of at least one recording mark and meets n/m≧1.25 for the time length of all the recording marks
2. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein β1 (1≦i≦m−1) is 0.5 to 2.5.
3. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein for the time length of all the recording marks, an average of α1T (1≦i≦m) is 3 nanoseconds or more and an average of β1T (1≦i≦m−1) is 3 nanoseconds or more.
4. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein for the time length of all the recording marks, α1T≧3 nanoseconds (1≦i≦m) and β1T≧3 nanoseconds (1≦i≦m−1) for each i.
5. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein for the time length of all the recording marks, n/m≧1.5 is met.
6. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein α11 (2≦i≦m−1) or β1-11 (2≦i≦m−1) takes a value of either 1.5, 2 or 2.5.
7. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein for at least two recording marks with different n's, the same pulse division number m is used and, at least one of α1 (1≦i≦m), β1 (1≦i≦m), η1, η2, Pw1 (1≦i≦m) and Pb1 (1≦i≦m) is different from any one of said at least two recording marks.
8. An optical recording method according to
claim 7
, wherein
when the mark length is expressed as nT=2LT (L is an integer equal to or larger than 2), the mark is divided into a division number m=L of sections and α1 and β1 in recording pulse sections α1T and off pulse sections β1T (these can change according to a value of L) are defined as follows:
α11=2+δ1
α11=2 (2≦i≦m−1) αmm=2+δ2
(where δ1 and δ2 are real numbers satisfying −0.5≦δ1≦0.5 and −1≦δ2≦1 respectively; and when L=2, only α1, β1, αm and βm exist);
when the mark length is expressed as nT=(2L+1)T, the mark is divided into a division number m=L of sections and α1′ and β1′ in recording pulse sections α1′T and off pulse sections β1′T (these can change according to a value of L) are defined as follows:
α1′+β1′=2.5+δ1′α1′+β1′=2 (2≦i≦m−1) αm′+βm′=2.5+δ2
(where δ1′ and δ2′ are real numbers satisfying −0.5≦δ1′≦0.5 and −1≦δ2′≦1 respectively; and when L=2, only α1′, β1′, αm′ and βm′ exist); and
α1, β1, αm, βm, α1′, β1′, αm′ and βm′ satisfy the following equation
α11mm+Δ=α1′+β1′+αm′+βm
(where Δ=0.8 to 1.2).
9. An optical recording method according to
claim 8
, wherein α1, β1, α1′ and β1′ satisfy the following equation:
α111 1′+β1
(where Δ1=0.4 to 0.6).
10. An optical recording method according to
claim 7
, wherein
when the mark length is expressed as nT=2LT (L is an integer equal to or larger than 2), the mark is divided into a division number m=L of sections and α1 and β1 in recording pulse sections α1T and off pulse sections β1T (these can change according to a value of L) are defined as follows:
T d11=2+ε1 β1-11=2 (2≦i≦m)
when the mark length is expressed as nT=(2L+1)T, the mark is divided into a division number m=L of sections and α1′ and β1′ in recording pulse sections α1′T and off pulse sections β1′T (these can change according to a value of L) are defined as follows:
T d1′+α1′=2+ε1′β1′+α2′=2.5+ε2′β1-1′+α1′=2 (3≦i≦m−1) βm−1′+αm′=2.5+ε3
(where when L=2, β1′+α2′=2.5+ε2′ or β1′+α2′=3+ε2′; Td1 and Td1′ are almost constant real numbers between −2 and 2, not dependent on L; and ε1, ε1′, ε2′ and ε3′ are real numbers between −1 and 1); and
β1, α2, βm−1, αm, β1′, α2′, βm−1′ and αm′ satisfy the following equation
β12m−1m21′+α2′+αm−1′+αm
(where Δ2=0.8 to 1.2).
11. An optical recording method according to
claim 10
, wherein for L equal to or more than 3, β1′=β1+approximately 0.5, βm−1′=βm−1+approximately 0.5, α1=0.8 α1′ to 1.2 α1′, αm=0.8 αm′ to 1.2 αm′ and βm=0.8 βm′ to 1.2 βm′.
12. An optical recording method according to
claim 8
, wherein in recording a mark with the mark length of nT=2T or 3T, the mark is divided into a division number m=1 of sections.
13. An optical recording method according to
claim 8
, wherein when L is larger than 3, α1 is held constant at α1=αc and αi′ is held constant at α1′=αc′ for 2≦i≦m−1.
14. An optical recording method according to
claim 13
, wherein when L is larger than 3, αc and αc′ are constant, not dependent on L.
15. An optical recording method according to
claim 13
, wherein when L is larger than 3, αc=αc′.
16. An optical recording method according to
claim 8
, wherein when L is larger than 3, each of Td1, Td1′, α1, α1′, β1, β1′ takes a constant value.
17. An optical recording method according to
claim 8
, wherein when L is larger than 3, each of αm, αm′, βm and βm′ takes a constant value.
18. An optical recording method according to
claim 8
, wherein by using a first reference clock 1 with a period of T and a second reference clock 2 with a period of T, which is shifted 0.5T from the first reference clock, α1 (1≦i≦m) is generated in synchronism with a reference clock 3 with a period of 2T that is produced by dividing the reference clock 1, and α1′ (2≦i≦m−1) is generated in synchronism with a reference clock 4 with a period of 2T that is produced by dividing the reference clock 2.
19. An optical recording method according to
claim 8
, wherein
for all L, a delay time Td1 with respect to a front end of a mark length to be recorded is provided at rising edges of recording pulses α1T and α1′T;
a reference time Tsync corresponding to a clock mark formed at a predetermined position on a recording track is generated;
a modulation signal corresponding to each mark length and space is generated by taking the reference time Tsync a start point;
four reference clocks are generated, the four reference clocks being a reference clock 1 a with a period of 2T which is generated with the delay time Td1 from the reference time Tsync taken as a start point, a reference clock 2 a with a period of 2T which leads the reference clock 1 a by 0.5T, a reference clock 1 b with a period of 2T which leads the reference clock 1 a by 1T, and a reference clock 2 b with a period of 2T which leads the reference clock 1 a by 1.5T;
when recording a mark of nT=2LT, gate groups G1 a and G1 b corresponding to timings of α1T, α1T (2≦i≦m−1) and αmT sections are generated in synchronism with either the reference clock 1 a or 1 b;
when recording a mark of nT=(2L+1)T, gate groups G2 a and G2 b corresponding to timings of α1′T, α1′T (2≦i≦m−1) and αm′T sections are generated in synchronism with either the reference clock 2 a or 2 b;
when n is even, a gate G3 of Σ(α11)T is generated with the delay time Td1 from the front end of the nT mark taken as a reference;
when n is odd, a gate G4 of Σ(α1′+β1′)T is generated with the delay time T′d1 from the front end of the nT mark taken as a reference;
a time that elapses from the reference time Tsync as a start point to the front end of the nT mark is counted as the number of reference clocks T;
when the elapsed time is an even number times the reference clock T, the gate signal group G1 a or G2 b is selected according to whether n is even or odd;
when the elapsed time is an odd number times the reference clock T, the gate signal group G1 b or G2 a is selected according to whether n is even or odd;
When both G3 and G4 are off, recording light with an erase power Pe is radiated;
when either G3 or G4 is on, recording light with a bias power Pb is radiated;
when G3 and G1 a are on at the same time, recording light with a recording power Pw is radiated in response to a G1 a-on section;
when G3 and G1 b are on at the same time, recording light with a recording power Pw is radiated in response to a G1 b-on section;
when G4 and G2 a are on at the same time, recording light with a recording power Pw is radiated in response to a G2 a-on section; and
when G4 and G2 b are on at the same time, recording light with a recording power Pw is radiated in response to a G2 b-on section.
20. An optical recording method according to
claim 10
, wherein for all L, a delay time Td1 or Td1′ with respect to a front end of a mark length to be recorded is provided at rising edges of recording pulses α1T and α1′T;
a reference time Tsync corresponding to a clock mark formed at a predetermined position on a recording track is generated;
a modulation signal corresponding to each mark length and space is generated by taking the reference time Tsync as a start point;
four reference clocks are generated, the four reference clocks being a reference clock la with a period of 2T which is generated from the reference time Tsync taken as a start point, a reference clock 2 a with a period of 2T which leads the reference clock 1 a by 0.5T, a reference clock 1 b with a period of 2T which leads the reference clock 1 a by 1T, and a reference clock 2 b with a period of 2T which leads the reference clock 1 a by 1.5T;
when recording a mark of nT=2LT, gate groups G1 a and G1 b corresponding to timings of α1T, α1T (2≦i≦m−1) and αmT sections are generated in synchronism with either the reference clock 1 a or 1 b;
when recording a mark of nT=(2L+)T, gate groups G2 a and G2 b corresponding to timings of α1′T, α1′T (2≦i≦m−1) and αm′T sections are generated in synchronism with either the reference clock 2 a or 2 b;
when n is even, a gate G3 of Σ(α11)T is generated with the delay time Td1 from the front end of the nT mark taken as a reference;
when n is odd, a gate G4 of Σ(α1′+β1′)T is generated with the delay time Td1 from the front end of the nT mark taken as a reference;
a time that elapses from the reference time Tsync as a start point to the front end of the nT mark is counted as the number of reference clocks T;
when the elapsed time is an even number times the reference clock T, the gate signal group G1 a or G2 b is selected according to whether n is even or odd;
when the elapsed time is an odd number times the reference clock T, the gate signal group G1 b or G2 a is selected according to whether n is even or odd;
When both G3 and G4 are off, recording light with an erase power Pe is radiated;
when either G3 or G4 is on, recording light with a bias power Pb is radiated;
when G3 and G1 a are on at the same time, recording light with a recording power Pw is radiated in response to a G1 a-on section;
when G3 and G1 b are on at the same time, recording light with a recording power Pw is radiated in response to a G1 b-on section;
when G4 and G2 a are on at the same time, recording light with a recording power Pw is radiated in response to a G2 a-on section; and
when G4 and G2 b are on at the same time, recording light with a recording power Pw is radiated in response to a G2 b-on section.
21. An optical recording method according to
claim 8
, wherein when performing a mark length modulation scheme recording on the same recording medium by using a plurality of linear velocities v while keeping v×T constant,
for L equal to or greater than 2, the periods of (α11)T and (α1′+βi′)T in 2≦i≦m−1 are kept constant independently of the linear velocity, Pw1, Pb1 and Pe in each i are kept almost constant independently of the linear velocity, and α1 and α1′ (2≦i≦m) are decreased as the linear velocity lowers.
22. An optical recording method according to
claim 10
, wherein when performing a mark length modulation scheme recording on the same recording medium by using a plurality of linear velocities v while keeping v×T constant,
for L equal to or greater than 2, the periods of (β1-11)T and (α101′+αi′)T in 2≦i≦m are kept constant independently of the linear velocity, Pw1, Pb1 and Pe in each i are kept almost constant independently of the linear velocity, and α1 and α1′(2≦i≦m) are decreased as the linear velocity lowers.
23. An optical recording method according to
claim 21
, wherein α1T and α1′T (2≦i≦m−1) are kept almost constant independently of the linear velocity.
24. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein the erase power Pe of Pb1≦Pe≦Pw1 (1≦i≦m) is radiated in a time length of the spaces.
25. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein the recording medium is a phase change type optical recording medium in which a crystal state is taken as an unrecorded/erased state and an amorphous state is taken as a recorded mark.
26. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein for the time length of all the recording marks, 4≧n/m≧1.5, Σii)≦0.6 n and Pb1/Pe≦0.2 are satisfied.
27. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein the linear velocity during recording is 10 m/s or higher and a minimum mark length is less than 0.8 μm.
28. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein a wavelength of the recording light is less than 500 nm, a numerical aperture of a lens for focusing the recording light is 0.6 or more, and the minimum mark length is less than 0.3 μm.
29. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein the mark length modulation scheme is an 8-16 modulation scheme or a (1, 7)-RLL-NRZI modulation scheme.
30. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein the mark length modulation scheme is an EFM modulation scheme in which the recording is performed by setting the linear velocity during recording to 10 or more times a CD reference linear velocity of 1.2 m/s to 1.4 m/s and keeping the recording linear density constant.
31. An optical recording method according to
claim 1
, wherein the mark length modulation scheme is an EFM modulation scheme in which the recording is performed by setting the linear velocity during recording to two or more times a DVD reference linear velocity of 3.49 m/s and keeping the recording linear density constant.
32. A phase change type optical recording medium recorded by the optical recording method claimed in
claim 1
, the phase change type optical recording medium having a recording layer made of MzGey(SbxTe1-x)1-y-z alloy (where 0≦z≦0.1, 0≦y≦0.3, 0.8≦x; and M is at least one of In, Ga, Si, Sn, Pb, Pd, Pt, Zn, Au, Ag, Zr, Hf, V, Nb, Ta, Cr, Co, Mo, Mn, Bi, O, N and S).
33. An optical recording method according to
claim 6
, wherein α1i (2≦i≦m−1) or β1011 (2≦i≦m−1) is kept constant independently of a real number i.
34. An optical recording method according to
claim 33
, wherein α11 (2≦i≦m−1) or β1-11 (2≦i≦m−1) takes a value of 2 independently of a real number i, further wherein α1=αc with respect to any one of i in a range of 2≦i≦m−1, said αc being a constant value.
35. An optical recording method according to claims 33 or 34, wherein α1 (2≦i≦m−1) is kept constant in the time length of the recording mark with having a pulse division number m being at least 3.
36. An optical recording method according to
claim 7
, wherein said at least two recording marks with different n's have each time length of the recording mark such that said each time length is adjacent to another.
37. An optical recording method according to
claim 36
, where at least one of (α11)T and (αmm)T is different from any one of the at least two recording marks with different n's.
38. An optical recording method according to
claim 36
, where at least one of (β12)T and (βm−1m)T is different from any one of the at least two recording marks with different n's.
39. An optical recording method according to
claim 7
, wherein α1i (2≦i≦m−1) or β1-11 (2≦i≦m−1) takes a value of 2 independently of a real number i.
US09/884,121 1999-05-19 2001-06-20 Optical recording method and optical recording medium Expired - Lifetime US6411579B2 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/141,981 US6661760B2 (en) 1999-05-19 2002-05-10 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US10/657,121 US7050377B1 (en) 1999-05-19 2003-09-09 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US10/825,439 USRE42786E1 (en) 1999-05-19 2004-04-16 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US11/217,593 US7085215B2 (en) 1999-05-19 2005-09-02 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US13/179,256 USRE45001E1 (en) 1999-05-19 2011-07-08 Optical recording method and optical recording medium

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP11-138067 1999-05-19
JP13806799 1999-05-19
JP2000-076514 2000-03-17
JP2000076514 2000-03-17
PCT/JP2000/003036 WO2000072316A1 (en) 1999-05-19 2000-05-11 Optical recording method and optical recording medium

Related Parent Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2000/003036 Continuation WO2000072316A1 (en) 1999-05-19 2000-05-11 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
PCT/JP2000/003036 Continuation-In-Part WO2000072316A1 (en) 1999-05-19 2000-05-11 Optical recording method and optical recording medium

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/141,981 Division US6661760B2 (en) 1999-05-19 2002-05-10 Optical recording method and optical recording medium

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20010053115A1 true US20010053115A1 (en) 2001-12-20
US6411579B2 US6411579B2 (en) 2002-06-25

Family

ID=26471209

Family Applications (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/884,121 Expired - Lifetime US6411579B2 (en) 1999-05-19 2001-06-20 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US10/141,981 Ceased US6661760B2 (en) 1999-05-19 2002-05-10 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US10/657,121 Expired - Lifetime US7050377B1 (en) 1999-05-19 2003-09-09 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US10/825,439 Expired - Lifetime USRE42786E1 (en) 1999-05-19 2004-04-16 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US11/217,593 Expired - Lifetime US7085215B2 (en) 1999-05-19 2005-09-02 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US13/179,256 Expired - Lifetime USRE45001E1 (en) 1999-05-19 2011-07-08 Optical recording method and optical recording medium

Family Applications After (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/141,981 Ceased US6661760B2 (en) 1999-05-19 2002-05-10 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US10/657,121 Expired - Lifetime US7050377B1 (en) 1999-05-19 2003-09-09 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US10/825,439 Expired - Lifetime USRE42786E1 (en) 1999-05-19 2004-04-16 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US11/217,593 Expired - Lifetime US7085215B2 (en) 1999-05-19 2005-09-02 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US13/179,256 Expired - Lifetime USRE45001E1 (en) 1999-05-19 2011-07-08 Optical recording method and optical recording medium

Country Status (9)

Country Link
US (6) US6411579B2 (en)
EP (3) EP1372146B1 (en)
JP (3) JP3899779B2 (en)
KR (3) KR100510568B1 (en)
CN (3) CN1316460C (en)
AU (1) AU4612500A (en)
DE (3) DE60030493T2 (en)
TW (3) TWI246074B (en)
WO (1) WO2000072316A1 (en)

Cited By (36)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1361570A2 (en) * 2002-05-10 2003-11-12 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Information recording method information recording apparatus and optical information recording medium
US20030214857A1 (en) * 2002-03-05 2003-11-20 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation Phase-change recording material used for information recording medium and information recording medium employing it
EP1398768A2 (en) * 2002-09-06 2004-03-17 Ricoh Company Recording method for a phase-change optical recording medium
US20040052177A1 (en) * 2002-09-04 2004-03-18 Hiroshi Maegawa Optical information recording method, apparatus, and medium, laser control circuit, wobble signal detection method, and servo signal detection method
US20040052176A1 (en) * 2002-07-11 2004-03-18 Shinya Narumi Optical information recording medium, method for determining recording condition, optical information recording apparatus, and information processing apparatus
US20040114488A1 (en) * 2002-11-06 2004-06-17 Yasuo Sawada Information recording apparatus and information recording method
EP1431966A2 (en) * 2002-12-18 2004-06-23 Ricoh Company Optical recording method
US20040170094A1 (en) * 2003-02-27 2004-09-02 Shintaro Takehara Disk apparatus and signal processing method
EP1475784A1 (en) * 2002-02-13 2004-11-10 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation Rewritable optical recording medium and optical recording method
US20050007920A1 (en) * 2003-07-07 2005-01-13 Kim Jin Yong Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20050007916A1 (en) * 2003-07-07 2005-01-13 Kim Jin Yong Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20050007917A1 (en) * 2003-07-09 2005-01-13 Kim Jin Yong Recording medium, method of configuring disc control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20050038957A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2005-02-17 Suh Sang Woon Information recording medium, method of configuring version information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and recording and reproducing apparatus thereof
US20050169148A1 (en) * 2004-01-30 2005-08-04 Soh Noguchi Recording and reading method and device for dye based write-once DVD medium
EP1569208A1 (en) * 2002-11-19 2005-08-31 TDK Corporation Method for recording data onto optical recording medium, data recording device, and optical recording medium
US20050213465A1 (en) * 2004-03-18 2005-09-29 Kohji Takeuchi Method of writing multi-level data using adjusted recording waveform
US20050254413A1 (en) * 2004-05-13 2005-11-17 Kim Jin Y Recording medium, read/write method thereof and read/write apparatus thereof
US20050276169A1 (en) * 2002-12-13 2005-12-15 Masaaki Mizuno Optical recording method
US20050286390A1 (en) * 2004-06-23 2005-12-29 Hiroyuki Minemura Recording method and optical disk device
US20050286383A1 (en) * 2004-06-28 2005-12-29 Tdk Corporation Method of recording data on optical recording media and optical recording device
US20060023591A1 (en) * 2004-07-30 2006-02-02 Junko Ushiyama Test-write method, information recording method, and information recording apparatus
US20060023622A1 (en) * 2004-07-27 2006-02-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method for recording control information in the recording medium, and method and apparatus for recording/reproducing data in/from the recording medium using the same
EP1684269A1 (en) * 2003-11-14 2006-07-26 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Information recording method, information recording device, and recording medium containing a program
US20060176793A1 (en) * 2005-02-10 2006-08-10 Hitachi, Ltd. Test writing method and information recording device
US20060215512A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2006-09-28 Kim Jin Y Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20060221791A1 (en) * 2003-07-07 2006-10-05 Suh Sang W Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20060233059A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2006-10-19 Suh Sang W Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20060285477A1 (en) * 2002-10-10 2006-12-21 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Optical data recording method
US20070153652A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2007-07-05 Kim Jin Y Recording and/or reproducing methods and apparatuses
EP1498884A3 (en) * 2003-07-18 2007-11-07 Sony Corporation Information recording device and information recording method
US20080025180A1 (en) * 2006-07-26 2008-01-31 Tsutomu Aoyama Information recording method for optical recording medium and optical recording apparatus
US20080092089A1 (en) * 2006-09-28 2008-04-17 Fujitsu Limited CAD data processing apparatus, CAD data processing method, and computer product
EP1426930A4 (en) * 2001-09-10 2008-12-10 Tdk Corp Method for recording information on optical recording medium, information recorder, and optical recording medium
US20120039157A1 (en) * 2010-08-12 2012-02-16 You-Wen Chang Method for recording critical patterns with different mark lengths onto optical storage medium and related controller thereof
US8687474B2 (en) * 2011-12-16 2014-04-01 Cmc Magnetics Corporation Recording apparatus and method
US20150124577A1 (en) * 2012-10-04 2015-05-07 Panasonic Intellectual Property Management Co., Inc. Optical information recording medium and optical information recording device

Families Citing this family (59)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE60030493T2 (en) 1999-05-19 2007-05-03 Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Co., Ltd. Optical recording medium and recording method
JP3719889B2 (en) * 1999-11-29 2005-11-24 株式会社リコー Recording method and recording apparatus for optical recording medium
EP1117094B1 (en) * 2000-01-17 2012-11-21 Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Co., Ltd. Recording method for phase-change recording medium
US20020160305A1 (en) * 2001-03-08 2002-10-31 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation Optical recording medium, method of writing and erasing information using the same, and process of producing the same
EP1251499A3 (en) * 2001-03-28 2006-10-25 TDK Corporation Readout method and apparatus for optical information medium
JP4814476B2 (en) 2001-04-20 2011-11-16 Tdk株式会社 Reproduction method of optical information medium
DE60236655D1 (en) * 2001-04-26 2010-07-22 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RECORDING MARKERS IN AN INFORMATION LAYER OF AN OPTICAL RECORDING CARRIER
JP2003305955A (en) * 2001-05-21 2003-10-28 Ricoh Co Ltd Optical recording medium and recording method
JP2008204624A (en) * 2001-05-21 2008-09-04 Ricoh Co Ltd Recording method for optical recording medium
JP3711902B2 (en) * 2001-07-30 2005-11-02 ヤマハ株式会社 Recording density determination method in optical disk recording
JP3820965B2 (en) * 2001-09-04 2006-09-13 日本電気株式会社 Recording / reproducing condition adjusting method for information recording medium and recording / reproducing apparatus using the same
US7760165B2 (en) * 2006-09-22 2010-07-20 Global Oled Technology Llc Control circuit for stacked OLED device
JP4560251B2 (en) * 2001-09-10 2010-10-13 パイオニア株式会社 Information recording apparatus and information recording method
JP2003085750A (en) 2001-09-11 2003-03-20 Tdk Corp Optical recording medium, method of recording information to optical recording medium and information recording device
TWI224783B (en) 2001-09-11 2004-12-01 Tdk Corp Optical recording medium, information recording method regarding optical recording medium and information recording device
WO2003028021A1 (en) * 2001-09-26 2003-04-03 Tdk Corporation Optical recording medium and its recording system
JP2003123252A (en) * 2001-10-09 2003-04-25 Hitachi Ltd Method and device for recording information
US7738335B2 (en) * 2001-10-17 2010-06-15 Tdk Corporation Method and apparatus for recording information on an optical recording medium
AU2003244419A1 (en) * 2002-02-06 2003-09-02 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Rewritable optical storage medium and use of such medium
JP3771859B2 (en) 2002-03-27 2006-04-26 株式会社リコー Optical information recording method and optical information recording apparatus
JP2003323717A (en) * 2002-05-02 2003-11-14 Pioneer Electronic Corp Information recording and reproducing device and method
JP3820181B2 (en) * 2002-05-10 2006-09-13 株式会社リコー Recording strategy generation method and optical information recording medium
AU2003242317A1 (en) * 2002-05-17 2003-12-02 Tdk Corporation Optical recording medium data recording method, optical recording medium data recorder, and optical recording medium
KR100911140B1 (en) * 2002-06-03 2009-08-06 삼성전자주식회사 Method and apparatus for recording data on an optical recording medium
KR100474366B1 (en) * 2002-06-07 2005-03-10 엘지.필립스 디스플레이 주식회사 The shadow mask of crt for improving a doming phenomenon
AU2003303263A1 (en) 2002-12-19 2004-07-14 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Method and recording device for recording marks in an information layer of an optical record carrier
JP3977740B2 (en) * 2002-12-27 2007-09-19 株式会社リコー Phase change optical recording medium and recording method thereof
US20040130993A1 (en) * 2003-01-02 2004-07-08 Nedi Nadershahi Method and apparatus for a high speed write strategy
JP4272892B2 (en) * 2003-01-08 2009-06-03 富士フイルム株式会社 Signal output method
TWI233605B (en) * 2003-01-10 2005-06-01 Mediatek Inc A method for writing data onto an optical storage medium
EP1596374B1 (en) * 2003-02-19 2011-10-12 Victor Company Of Japan, Limited Optical recording method and optical recording apparatus
JP2004255698A (en) * 2003-02-26 2004-09-16 Victor Co Of Japan Ltd Optical recording medium
EP1598816A4 (en) * 2003-02-28 2008-12-31 Pioneer Corp Information recording device and information recording method
JP3938075B2 (en) * 2003-03-11 2007-06-27 ヤマハ株式会社 Optical disc recording method and optical disc recording apparatus
EP1482486A3 (en) 2003-05-27 2007-06-27 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Optical information recording method, optical information recording device and optical information recording medium
CN1816868A (en) * 2003-07-03 2006-08-09 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for recording marks on a write-once record carrier
KR100889715B1 (en) * 2003-07-18 2009-03-23 미츠비시 가가쿠 메디아 가부시키가이샤 Optical recording method
JP2007503666A (en) * 2003-08-27 2007-02-22 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エレクトロニクス エヌ ヴィ Write strategy for data storage systems
WO2005027103A1 (en) 2003-09-16 2005-03-24 Lg Electronics Inc. A recording method for a phase change optical disc
EP1675107A4 (en) 2003-10-17 2009-02-18 Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Co Ltd Optical recording method
KR20050045528A (en) * 2003-11-11 2005-05-17 삼성전자주식회사 Information storage medium, method and apparatus for recording data thereon
US20070183288A1 (en) * 2004-03-10 2007-08-09 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Method and device for recording marks in an information layer of an optical record carrier
EP1756809B1 (en) * 2004-06-03 2008-06-18 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Record carrier with improved modulation and asymmetry
CN101714369B (en) 2004-07-16 2013-04-24 三菱化学媒体株式会社 Optical recording medium and optical recording method of the same
CN1734584A (en) * 2004-08-13 2006-02-15 皇家飞利浦电子股份有限公司 Method and apparatus for determining parameter for CD recording
KR100565079B1 (en) * 2004-09-08 2006-03-30 삼성전자주식회사 Code generation method, modulation apparatus and modulation method
JP2006107696A (en) 2004-09-13 2006-04-20 Ricoh Co Ltd Optical information recording medium, recording method and test method therefor
US20060188684A1 (en) * 2005-02-22 2006-08-24 Katsuyuki Yamada Optical recording medium, optical recording method and apparatus
JP4012934B1 (en) 2005-03-02 2007-11-28 株式会社リコー Optical recording medium and optical recording method and optical recording apparatus using multilayer optical recording medium
JP4403413B2 (en) * 2005-05-11 2010-01-27 ソニー株式会社 Phase change optical information recording medium
US7561508B2 (en) * 2005-08-31 2009-07-14 Mediatek Inc. Method and apparatus for laser control during recording
US7778132B2 (en) * 2005-08-31 2010-08-17 Mediatek Inc. System and method for optimizing write strategy parameters using two-stage adjustment
JP2007335044A (en) * 2006-06-19 2007-12-27 Hitachi Ltd Information recording device
JP4303267B2 (en) * 2006-07-26 2009-07-29 Tdk株式会社 Information recording method and optical recording apparatus for optical recording medium
WO2008029856A1 (en) 2006-09-06 2008-03-13 Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Co., Ltd. Optical recording medium
US8206804B2 (en) * 2008-08-29 2012-06-26 Corning Incorporated Phase change memory materials
JP2010067288A (en) * 2008-09-08 2010-03-25 Hitachi Ltd Optical information recording method
JP4623202B2 (en) * 2008-11-04 2011-02-02 Tdk株式会社 Information recording method and optical recording apparatus for optical recording medium
JP5693345B2 (en) * 2011-04-14 2015-04-01 昭和電工株式会社 Thermally assisted magnetic recording medium and magnetic recording / reproducing apparatus

Family Cites Families (36)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS6120236A (en) * 1984-07-09 1986-01-29 Hitachi Ltd Initializing system of reversible optical disk
CN1010519B (en) * 1985-09-25 1990-11-21 松下电器产业株式会社 Invertible optical recording information dielectrical
JP2719130B2 (en) 1986-05-02 1998-02-25 株式会社日立製作所 Information recording / reproducing and rewriting method and device
JPS6322439A (en) 1987-04-16 1988-01-29 Canon Inc Recording device having refeeding means
JP2702923B2 (en) 1987-04-24 1998-01-26 株式会社日立製作所 Information recording method and information recording device
JPH01303643A (en) * 1988-06-01 1989-12-07 Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> Laser recording medium
JPH0810490B2 (en) * 1989-03-20 1996-01-31 富士通株式会社 Optical disk information writing control method and apparatus therefor
JP3151848B2 (en) 1991-04-25 2001-04-03 松下電器産業株式会社 Optical information recording medium
JPH06127135A (en) * 1992-10-21 1994-05-10 Toray Ind Inc Optical record medium
US5703855A (en) * 1993-04-06 1997-12-30 Hitachi, Ltd. Optical disk apparatus and recording and reading method for an optical disk using the same
JP3255204B2 (en) 1993-07-22 2002-02-12 株式会社リコー Optical information recording method
JPH0737251A (en) 1993-07-22 1995-02-07 Ricoh Co Ltd Optical information recording method
US5568461A (en) * 1994-04-20 1996-10-22 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Optical information recording and reproducing apparatus
JP2840028B2 (en) 1994-07-11 1998-12-24 日立電子株式会社 Wireless telephone system
US5530688A (en) * 1994-10-31 1996-06-25 International Business Machines Corporation Optical disk recording device using two modulated laser beams for recording information data
JP3171103B2 (en) * 1995-03-31 2001-05-28 三菱化学株式会社 Optical recording method and optical recording medium
DE19612823C2 (en) * 1995-03-31 2001-03-01 Mitsubishi Chem Corp Optical recording process
JP3138610B2 (en) 1995-04-13 2001-02-26 株式会社リコー Recording method for phase change optical disk
JPH0935269A (en) * 1995-07-19 1997-02-07 Mitsubishi Chem Corp Recording method for optical information recording medium
JP3365463B2 (en) * 1995-09-08 2003-01-14 三菱化学株式会社 Optical information recording medium and recording method
US5732062A (en) * 1995-10-16 1998-03-24 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Information recording apparatus, method and computer program product
JP2867950B2 (en) * 1996-03-15 1999-03-10 日本電気株式会社 Optical disk initialization device
JP3022770B2 (en) * 1996-04-16 2000-03-21 三菱化学株式会社 Optical recording method, apparatus and optical recording medium
US6143468A (en) * 1996-10-04 2000-11-07 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation Optical information recording medium and optical recording method
JP3493913B2 (en) 1996-10-04 2004-02-03 三菱化学株式会社 Optical information recording medium
JP3255051B2 (en) * 1996-12-05 2002-02-12 三菱化学株式会社 Optical information recording medium
KR100505796B1 (en) * 1997-02-14 2005-10-19 코닌클리케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. Recording method and recording apparatus for optical recording medium
JPH10241160A (en) * 1997-02-21 1998-09-11 Nec Corp Initialization of phase-change recording medium
IES80477B2 (en) * 1997-03-27 1998-08-12 Mitsubishi Chem Corp Optical information recording medium
JP3575274B2 (en) * 1997-03-27 2004-10-13 三菱化学株式会社 Optical information recording medium
TW411457B (en) 1997-08-01 2000-11-11 Hitachi Maxell Information recording medium
JP3323782B2 (en) * 1997-09-09 2002-09-09 株式会社日立製作所 How information is recorded
EP1628296B1 (en) * 1997-11-17 2013-03-06 Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Co., Ltd. Optical information recording medium
JPH11175976A (en) 1997-12-09 1999-07-02 Hitachi Ltd Information recording device
AU5647299A (en) * 1998-09-09 2000-03-27 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation Optical information recording medium and optical recording method
DE60030493T2 (en) * 1999-05-19 2007-05-03 Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Co., Ltd. Optical recording medium and recording method

Cited By (126)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1426930A4 (en) * 2001-09-10 2008-12-10 Tdk Corp Method for recording information on optical recording medium, information recorder, and optical recording medium
EP1475784A4 (en) * 2002-02-13 2012-03-14 Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Co Ltd Rewritable optical recording medium and optical recording method
EP1475784A1 (en) * 2002-02-13 2004-11-10 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation Rewritable optical recording medium and optical recording method
US7166415B2 (en) * 2002-03-05 2007-01-23 Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Co., Ltd. Phase-change recording material used for information recording medium and information recording medium employing it
US20030214857A1 (en) * 2002-03-05 2003-11-20 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation Phase-change recording material used for information recording medium and information recording medium employing it
US7453784B2 (en) * 2002-05-10 2008-11-18 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Information recording method, information recording apparatus, and optical information recording medium
EP1736972A3 (en) * 2002-05-10 2007-01-24 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Information recording method, information recording apparatus, and optical information recording medium.
EP1361570A2 (en) * 2002-05-10 2003-11-12 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Information recording method information recording apparatus and optical information recording medium
US20060256689A1 (en) * 2002-05-10 2006-11-16 Masaki Kato Information recording method, information recording apparatus, and optical information recording medium
EP1361570A3 (en) * 2002-05-10 2006-10-04 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Information recording method information recording apparatus and optical information recording medium
US20040052176A1 (en) * 2002-07-11 2004-03-18 Shinya Narumi Optical information recording medium, method for determining recording condition, optical information recording apparatus, and information processing apparatus
EP1398769A3 (en) * 2002-09-04 2007-03-21 Ricoh Company Optical information recording method, apparatus and medium, laser control circuit, wobble signal detection method, and servo signal detection method
US20040052177A1 (en) * 2002-09-04 2004-03-18 Hiroshi Maegawa Optical information recording method, apparatus, and medium, laser control circuit, wobble signal detection method, and servo signal detection method
US7474603B2 (en) 2002-09-04 2009-01-06 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Optical information recording method, apparatus, and medium, laser control circuit, wobble signal detection method, and servo signal detection method
EP1398768A2 (en) * 2002-09-06 2004-03-17 Ricoh Company Recording method for a phase-change optical recording medium
US20040076099A1 (en) * 2002-09-06 2004-04-22 Hajime Yuzurihara Recording method for a phase-change optical recording medium
US7260044B2 (en) 2002-09-06 2007-08-21 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Recording method for a phase-change optical recording medium
US20070147210A1 (en) * 2002-09-06 2007-06-28 Hajime Yuzurihara Recording method for a phase-change optical recording medium
EP1398768A3 (en) * 2002-09-06 2006-05-17 Ricoh Company Recording method for a phase-change optical recording medium
US8023380B2 (en) 2002-10-10 2011-09-20 Panasonic Corporation Optical data recording method
US20070291612A1 (en) * 2002-10-10 2007-12-20 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Optical data recording method
US7489612B2 (en) * 2002-10-10 2009-02-10 Panasonic Corporation Recording method and media having marks and spaces with lengths defined by a predetermined modulation method
US7489613B2 (en) * 2002-10-10 2009-02-10 Panasonic Corporation Recording method and media having marks and spaces with lengths defined by a predetermined modulation method
US7489614B2 (en) * 2002-10-10 2009-02-10 Panasonic Corporation Recording method and media having marks and spaces with lengths defined by a predetermined modulation method
US7492689B2 (en) * 2002-10-10 2009-02-17 Panasonic Corporation Recording method and media having marks and spaces with lengths defined by a predetermined modulation method
US7486605B2 (en) * 2002-10-10 2009-02-03 Panasonic Corporation Recording method and media having marks and spaces with lengths defined by a predetermined modulation method
US20090097374A1 (en) * 2002-10-10 2009-04-16 Panasonic Corporation Optical Data Recording Method
US20080253252A1 (en) * 2002-10-10 2008-10-16 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Recording method
US20080112295A1 (en) * 2002-10-10 2008-05-15 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Method for Producing Data Storage Medium
US20080112296A1 (en) * 2002-10-10 2008-05-15 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Method for Producing Data Storage Medium
US20060285477A1 (en) * 2002-10-10 2006-12-21 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Optical data recording method
US20040114488A1 (en) * 2002-11-06 2004-06-17 Yasuo Sawada Information recording apparatus and information recording method
EP1569208A1 (en) * 2002-11-19 2005-08-31 TDK Corporation Method for recording data onto optical recording medium, data recording device, and optical recording medium
EP1569208A4 (en) * 2002-11-19 2008-03-05 Tdk Corp Method for recording data onto optical recording medium, data recording device, and optical recording medium
US7532555B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2009-05-12 Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Co., Ltd. Phase-change recording layer optical recording method
US7443776B2 (en) 2002-12-13 2008-10-28 Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Co., Ltd. Optical recording method
US20070127344A1 (en) * 2002-12-13 2007-06-07 Masaaki Mizuno Optical recording method
US20090022028A1 (en) * 2002-12-13 2009-01-22 Mitsubishi Kagaku Media Corporation, Ltd. Optical recording medium
US20050276169A1 (en) * 2002-12-13 2005-12-15 Masaaki Mizuno Optical recording method
EP1431966A2 (en) * 2002-12-18 2004-06-23 Ricoh Company Optical recording method
EP1431966A3 (en) * 2002-12-18 2007-03-21 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Optical recording method
US20040170094A1 (en) * 2003-02-27 2004-09-02 Shintaro Takehara Disk apparatus and signal processing method
US20070247986A1 (en) * 2003-07-07 2007-10-25 Kim Jin Y Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7460453B2 (en) 2003-07-07 2008-12-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method of recording and/or reproducing speed information on a recording medium, and apparatus thereof
US20060221790A1 (en) * 2003-07-07 2006-10-05 Suh Sang W Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20060221791A1 (en) * 2003-07-07 2006-10-05 Suh Sang W Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7719934B2 (en) 2003-07-07 2010-05-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7639584B2 (en) 2003-07-07 2009-12-29 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20070247987A1 (en) * 2003-07-07 2007-10-25 Kim Jin Y Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20050007920A1 (en) * 2003-07-07 2005-01-13 Kim Jin Yong Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7817514B2 (en) 2003-07-07 2010-10-19 Lg Electronics, Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7599273B2 (en) 2003-07-07 2009-10-06 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7872955B2 (en) 2003-07-07 2011-01-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20050007916A1 (en) * 2003-07-07 2005-01-13 Kim Jin Yong Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7680012B2 (en) 2003-07-07 2010-03-16 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US8310907B2 (en) 2003-07-07 2012-11-13 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and/or reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7468937B2 (en) 2003-07-07 2008-12-23 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of recording control information on a recording medium, and apparatus thereof
US20050007917A1 (en) * 2003-07-09 2005-01-13 Kim Jin Yong Recording medium, method of configuring disc control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7564760B2 (en) 2003-07-09 2009-07-21 Lg Electronics, Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring disc control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7596064B2 (en) 2003-07-09 2009-09-29 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of recording data on a multi-layer recording medium, recording medium, and apparatus thereof
US20070171791A1 (en) * 2003-07-09 2007-07-26 Kim Jin Y Method of recording data on a multi-layer recording medium, recording medium, and apparatus thereof
US20070165502A1 (en) * 2003-07-09 2007-07-19 Kim Jin Y Method of recording data on a multi-layer recording medium, recording medium, and apparatus thereof
US7542395B2 (en) 2003-07-09 2009-06-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of recording data on a multi-layer recording medium, recording medium, and apparatus thereof
EP1498884A3 (en) * 2003-07-18 2007-11-07 Sony Corporation Information recording device and information recording method
US20080130436A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2008-06-05 Sang Woon Suh Information recording medium, method of configuring version information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and recording and reproducing apparatus thereof
US7652960B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2010-01-26 Lg Electronics, Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
EP1921619A3 (en) * 2003-08-14 2008-07-30 LG Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20080151713A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2008-06-26 Jin Yong Kim Recording and/or reproducing methods and appratuses
EP1923870A2 (en) 2003-08-14 2008-05-21 LG Electronics Inc. Method of configuring control information of a recording medium, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20080112283A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2008-05-15 Sang Woon Suh Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
EP1921619A2 (en) 2003-08-14 2008-05-14 LG Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7468936B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2008-12-23 Lg Electronics Co., Ltd. Recording and/or reproducing methods and apparatuses
US8427920B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2013-04-23 Lg Electronics Inc Information recording medium, method of configuring version information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and recording and reproducing apparatus thereof
US20050038957A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2005-02-17 Suh Sang Woon Information recording medium, method of configuring version information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and recording and reproducing apparatus thereof
US8102745B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2012-01-24 Lg Electronics, Inc. Information recording medium, method of configuring version information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and recording and reproducing apparatus thereof
US20080043590A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2008-02-21 Suh Sang W Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20080043588A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2008-02-21 Suh Sang W Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7701817B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2010-04-20 Lg Electronics, Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7701819B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2010-04-20 Lg Electronics, Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20070156953A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2007-07-05 Suh Sang W Information recording medium, method of configuring version information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and recording and reproducing apparatus thereof
US20070153653A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2007-07-05 Kim Jin Y Recording and/or reproducing methods and appratuses
US20070153652A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2007-07-05 Kim Jin Y Recording and/or reproducing methods and apparatuses
US7697384B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2010-04-13 Lg Electronics, Inc. Recording and/or reproducing methods and appratuses
US20070150518A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2007-06-28 Suh Sang W Information recording medium, method of configuring version information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and recording and reproducing apparatus thereof
US7684292B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2010-03-23 Lg Electronics, Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
EP1923870A3 (en) * 2003-08-14 2008-07-30 LG Electronics Inc. Method of configuring control information of a recording medium, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7542391B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2009-06-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording and/or reproducing methods and apparatuses
US20060233059A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2006-10-19 Suh Sang W Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US20060215512A1 (en) * 2003-08-14 2006-09-28 Kim Jin Y Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7577074B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2009-08-18 Lg Electronics, Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7650362B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2010-01-19 Lg Electronics Inc. Information recording medium, method of configuring version information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and recording and reproducing apparatus thereof
US7630280B2 (en) 2003-08-14 2009-12-08 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, recording and reproducing method using the same, and apparatus thereof
US7512050B2 (en) 2003-11-14 2009-03-31 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Information recording method, information recording device, and recording medium containing a program, with recording marks formed by emitting light
EP1684269A4 (en) * 2003-11-14 2009-02-04 Ricoh Kk Information recording method, information recording device, and recording medium containing a program
US20060245336A1 (en) * 2003-11-14 2006-11-02 Kenya Yokoi Information recording method, information recording device and recording medium contaning a program
EP1684269A1 (en) * 2003-11-14 2006-07-26 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Information recording method, information recording device, and recording medium containing a program
US20050169148A1 (en) * 2004-01-30 2005-08-04 Soh Noguchi Recording and reading method and device for dye based write-once DVD medium
US7480223B2 (en) * 2004-01-30 2009-01-20 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Recording and reading method and device for dye based write-once DVD medium
US7688695B2 (en) * 2004-03-18 2010-03-30 Ricoh Company, Ltd. Method of writing multi-level data using adjusted recording waveform
US20050213465A1 (en) * 2004-03-18 2005-09-29 Kohji Takeuchi Method of writing multi-level data using adjusted recording waveform
US20050254413A1 (en) * 2004-05-13 2005-11-17 Kim Jin Y Recording medium, read/write method thereof and read/write apparatus thereof
US20110134736A1 (en) * 2004-05-13 2011-06-09 Jin Yong Kim Recording medium, read/write method thereof and read/write apparatus thereof
US7706230B2 (en) 2004-05-13 2010-04-27 Lg Electronics, Inc. Recording medium, read/write method thereof and read/write apparatus thereof
US8279734B2 (en) 2004-05-13 2012-10-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, read/write method thereof and read/write apparatus thereof
US20050286390A1 (en) * 2004-06-23 2005-12-29 Hiroyuki Minemura Recording method and optical disk device
US7349314B2 (en) * 2004-06-23 2008-03-25 Hitachi, Ltd. Recording method and optical disk device
US7742374B2 (en) * 2004-06-28 2010-06-22 Tdk Corporation Method of recording data on optical recording media and optical recording device
US20050286383A1 (en) * 2004-06-28 2005-12-29 Tdk Corporation Method of recording data on optical recording media and optical recording device
US8085636B2 (en) 2004-07-27 2011-12-27 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method for recording control information in the recording medium, and method and apparatus for recording/reproducing data in/from the recording medium using the same
US20060023622A1 (en) * 2004-07-27 2006-02-02 Lg Electronics Inc. Recording medium, method for recording control information in the recording medium, and method and apparatus for recording/reproducing data in/from the recording medium using the same
US20100271917A1 (en) * 2004-07-30 2010-10-28 Junko Ushiyama Test-write method, information recording method, and information recording apparatus
US7751293B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2010-07-06 Hitachi, Ltd. Test-write method, information recording method, and information recording apparatus
US20060023591A1 (en) * 2004-07-30 2006-02-02 Junko Ushiyama Test-write method, information recording method, and information recording apparatus
US8085638B2 (en) 2004-07-30 2011-12-27 Hitachi, Ltd. Test-write method, information recording method, and information recording apparatus
US7529165B2 (en) 2005-02-10 2009-05-05 Hitachi, Ltd. Test writing method and information recording device
US7957240B2 (en) 2005-02-10 2011-06-07 Hitachi, Ltd. Test writing method and information recording device
US20090252005A1 (en) * 2005-02-10 2009-10-08 Hitachi, Ltd. Test writing method and information recording device
US20060176793A1 (en) * 2005-02-10 2006-08-10 Hitachi, Ltd. Test writing method and information recording device
US20080025180A1 (en) * 2006-07-26 2008-01-31 Tsutomu Aoyama Information recording method for optical recording medium and optical recording apparatus
US8213283B2 (en) 2006-07-26 2012-07-03 Tdk Corporation Information recording method for optical recording medium and optical recording apparatus
US20080092089A1 (en) * 2006-09-28 2008-04-17 Fujitsu Limited CAD data processing apparatus, CAD data processing method, and computer product
US20120039157A1 (en) * 2010-08-12 2012-02-16 You-Wen Chang Method for recording critical patterns with different mark lengths onto optical storage medium and related controller thereof
US8385172B2 (en) * 2010-08-12 2013-02-26 Mediatek Inc. Method for recording critical patterns with different mark lengths onto optical storage medium and related controller thereof
TWI455123B (en) * 2010-08-12 2014-10-01 Mediatek Inc Method for recording marks with different lengths onto optical storage medium and controller for controlling optical pick-up unit to record marks with different lengths onto optical storage medium
US8687474B2 (en) * 2011-12-16 2014-04-01 Cmc Magnetics Corporation Recording apparatus and method
US20150124577A1 (en) * 2012-10-04 2015-05-07 Panasonic Intellectual Property Management Co., Inc. Optical information recording medium and optical information recording device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP4210722B2 (en) 2009-01-21
DE60030493D1 (en) 2006-10-12
DE60030493T2 (en) 2007-05-03
DE60031111T2 (en) 2007-04-12
EP1372146B1 (en) 2007-11-14
EP1372146A2 (en) 2003-12-17
KR100491831B1 (en) 2005-05-27
JP2001331936A (en) 2001-11-30
CN1217324C (en) 2005-08-31
USRE42786E1 (en) 2011-10-04
EP1376563A3 (en) 2004-07-14
CN1312668C (en) 2007-04-25
CN1347553A (en) 2002-05-01
US7050377B1 (en) 2006-05-23
EP1376563A2 (en) 2004-01-02
WO2000072316A1 (en) 2000-11-30
US20020159366A1 (en) 2002-10-31
TWI250521B (en) 2006-03-01
JP2005285327A (en) 2005-10-13
EP1182649A4 (en) 2003-01-22
US20060013098A1 (en) 2006-01-19
KR100561901B1 (en) 2006-03-17
DE60037146D1 (en) 2007-12-27
EP1182649A1 (en) 2002-02-27
KR20010113869A (en) 2001-12-28
USRE45001E1 (en) 2014-07-08
JP2007008168A (en) 2007-01-18
TW200501113A (en) 2005-01-01
CN1619655A (en) 2005-05-25
KR20050016670A (en) 2005-02-21
TWI246074B (en) 2005-12-21
US6411579B2 (en) 2002-06-25
KR100510568B1 (en) 2005-08-26
CN1316460C (en) 2007-05-16
US7085215B2 (en) 2006-08-01
EP1372146A3 (en) 2004-04-28
EP1376563B1 (en) 2006-08-30
DE60031111D1 (en) 2006-11-16
EP1182649B1 (en) 2006-10-04
EP1372146A8 (en) 2004-03-10
KR20040049870A (en) 2004-06-12
US6661760B2 (en) 2003-12-09
JP3899779B2 (en) 2007-03-28
AU4612500A (en) 2000-12-12
DE60037146T2 (en) 2008-03-06
CN1619654A (en) 2005-05-25

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6411579B2 (en) Optical recording method and optical recording medium
US7858167B2 (en) Rewritable optical recording medium and optical recording method
US5818808A (en) Optical recording process and optical recording system
JP3171103B2 (en) Optical recording method and optical recording medium
JP2005122874A (en) Optical recording method
US7532555B2 (en) Phase-change recording layer optical recording method
JPH0935269A (en) Recording method for optical information recording medium
JP4405739B2 (en) Optical recording method for rewritable optical recording medium
JP2004206866A (en) Optical recording method
JP2002245630A (en) Medium, method, and device for information recording
JP2006239868A (en) Phase changing-type optical recording medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION, JAPAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:NOBUKUNI, NATSUKO;HORIE, MICHIKAZU;REEL/FRAME:011924/0307

Effective date: 20010607

STCF Information on status: patent grant

Free format text: PATENTED CASE

FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 4

CC Certificate of correction
AS Assignment

Owner name: MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD., JAPAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL CORPORATION;REEL/FRAME:023196/0428

Effective date: 20090824

FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 8

FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 12

AS Assignment

Owner name: MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD., JAPAN

Free format text: CHANGE OF ADDRESS;ASSIGNOR:MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD.;REEL/FRAME:050977/0911

Effective date: 20131112

Owner name: MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL MEDIA CO., LTD., JAPAN

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:MITSUBISHI KAGAKU MEDIA CO., LTD.;REEL/FRAME:050978/0091

Effective date: 20170401

AS Assignment

Owner name: CMC MAGNETICS CORPORATION, TAIWAN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:MITSUBISHI CHEMICAL MEDIA CO., LTD.;REEL/FRAME:051688/0598

Effective date: 20191231